Contents

Mitsubishi R32ENCPU Controller Network User's Manual PDF

1 of 222
1 of 222

Summary of Content for Mitsubishi R32ENCPU Controller Network User's Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Controller Network User's Manual (Application)

-RJ71EN71 -RJ71GP21-SX -RJ71GP21S-SX -R04ENCPU -R08ENCPU -R16ENCPU -R32ENCPU -R120ENCPU

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Read these precautions before using this product.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly. The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only. For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system, refer to the MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual. In this manual, the safety precautions are classified into two levels: " WARNING" and " CAUTION".

Under some circumstances, failure to observe the precautions given under " CAUTION" may lead to serious consequences. Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety. Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

1

2

[Design Precautions]

WARNING Configure safety circuits external to the programmable controller to ensure that the entire system

operates safely even when a fault occurs in the external power supply or the programmable controller. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction. (1) Emergency stop circuits, protection circuits, and protective interlock circuits for conflicting

operations (such as forward/reverse rotations or upper/lower limit positioning) must be configured external to the programmable controller.

(2) When the programmable controller detects an abnormal condition, it stops the operation and all outputs are: Turned off if the overcurrent or overvoltage protection of the power supply module is activated. Held or turned off according to the parameter setting if the self-diagnostic function of the CPU

module detects an error such as a watchdog timer error. (3) All outputs may be turned on if an error occurs in a part, such as an I/O control part, where the

CPU module cannot detect any error. To ensure safety operation in such a case, provide a safety mechanism or a fail-safe circuit external to the programmable controller. For a fail-safe circuit example, refer to "General Safety Requirements" in the MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual.

(4) Outputs may remain on or off due to a failure of a component such as a relay and transistor in an output circuit. Configure an external circuit for monitoring output signals that could cause a serious accident.

In an output circuit, when a load current exceeding the rated current or an overcurrent caused by a load short-circuit flows for a long time, it may cause smoke and fire. To prevent this, configure an external safety circuit, such as a fuse.

Configure a circuit so that the programmable controller is turned on first and then the external power supply. If the external power supply is turned on first, an accident may occur due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

For the operating status of each station after a communication failure, refer to manuals relevant to the network. Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident.

When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely. For other forms of control (such as program modification, parameter change, forced output, or operating status change) of a running programmable controller, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding. Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.

[Design Precautions]

[Design Precautions]

WARNING Especially, when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device, immediate

action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.

Do not write any data to the "system area" and "write-protect area" of the buffer memory in the module. Also, do not use any "use prohibited" signals as an output signal from the CPU module to each module. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system. For the "system area", "write-protect area", and the "use prohibited" signals, refer to the user's manual for the module used.

If a communication cable is disconnected, the network may be unstable, resulting in a communication failure of multiple stations. Configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely even if communications fail. Failure to do so may result in an accident due to an incorrect output or malfunction.

[Precautions for using CC-Link IE Controller Network (when optical fiber cables are used)] The optical transmitter and receiver of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module use laser diodes

(class 1 in accordance with IEC 60825-1). Do not look directly at a laser beam. Doing so may harm your eyes.

CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power

cables. Doing so may result in malfunction due to electromagnetic interference. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between those cables.

During control of an inductive load such as a lamp, heater, or solenoid valve, a large current (approximately ten times greater than normal) may flow when the output is turned from off to on. Therefore, use a module that has a sufficient current rating.

After the CPU module is powered on or is reset, the time taken to enter the RUN status varies depending on the system configuration, parameter settings, and/or program size. Design circuits so that the entire system will always operate safely, regardless of the time.

Do not power off the programmable controller or reset the CPU module while the settings are being written. Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM undefined. The values need to be set in the buffer memory and written to the flash ROM again. Doing so also may cause malfunction or failure of the module.

When changing the operating status of the CPU module from external devices (such as the remote RUN/STOP functions), select "Do Not OPEN in Program" for "Open Method Setting" of "Module Parameter". If "OPEN in Program" is selected, an execution of the remote STOP function causes the communication line to close. Consequently, the CPU module cannot reopen the line, and external devices cannot execute the remote RUN function.

3

4

[Security Precautions]

[Installation Precautions]

[Installation Precautions]

WARNING To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the programmable controller and

the system against unauthorized access, denial-of-service (DoS) attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external devices via the network, take appropriate measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions.

WARNING Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing the

module. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction.

CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the Safety

Guidelines included with the base unit. Failure to do so may result in electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to or deterioration of the product.

To mount a module, place the concave part(s) located at the bottom onto the guide(s) of the base unit, and push in the module until the hook(s) located at the top snaps into place. Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction, failure, or drop of the module.

When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations, fix the module with a screw.

Tighten the screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.

When using an extension cable, connect it to the extension cable connector of the base unit securely. Check the connection for looseness. Poor contact may cause malfunction.

When using an SD memory card, fully insert it into the SD memory card slot. Check that it is inserted completely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.

Securely insert an extended SRAM cassette or a battery-less option cassette into the cassette connector of the CPU module. After insertion, close the cassette cover and check that the cassette is inserted completely. Poor contact may cause malfunction.

Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module, SD memory card, extended SRAM cassette, battery-less option cassette, or connector. Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module.

[Wiring Precautions]

WARNING Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before installation and wiring.

Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction. After installation and wiring, attach a blank cover module (RG60) to each empty slot before powering

on the system for operation. Also, attach an extension connector protective cover*1 to each unused extension cable connector as necessary. Directly touching any conductive parts of the connectors while power is on may result in electric shock. *1 For details, please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric representative.

5

6

[Wiring Precautions]

CAUTION Individually ground the FG and LG terminals of the programmable controller with a ground resistance

of 100 ohms or less. Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction. Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them within the specified torque range. If any spade

solderless terminal is used, it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose, resulting in failure.

Check the rated voltage and signal layout before wiring to the module, and connect the cables correctly. Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause fire or failure.

Connectors for external devices must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer, or must be correctly soldered. Incomplete connections may cause short circuit, fire, or malfunction.

Securely connect the connector to the module. Poor contact may cause malfunction. Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power

cables. Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them. Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise.

Place the cables in a duct or clamp them. If not, dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled, resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact. Do not clamp the extension cables with the jacket stripped. Doing so may change the characteristics of the cables, resulting in malfunction.

Check the interface type and correctly connect the cable. Incorrect wiring (connecting the cable to an incorrect interface) may cause failure of the module and external device.

Tighten the terminal screws or connector screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the screw, short circuit, fire, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, fire, or malfunction.

When disconnecting the cable from the module, do not pull the cable by the cable part. For the cable with connector, hold the connector part of the cable. For the cable connected to the terminal block, loosen the terminal screw. Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable.

Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module. Such foreign matter can cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.

When a protective film is attached to the top of the module, remove it before system operation. If not, inadequate heat dissipation of the module may cause a fire, failure, or malfunction.

Programmable controllers must be installed in control panels. Connect the main power supply to the power supply module in the control panel through a relay terminal block. Wiring and replacement of a power supply module must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel with knowledge of protection against electric shock. For wiring, refer to the MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual.

For Ethernet cables to be used in the system, select the ones that meet the specifications in the user's manual for the module used. If not, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.

[Precautions for using CC-Link IE Controller Network (when optical fiber cables are used)] For optical fiber cables to be used in the system, select the ones that meet the specifications in the

MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup). If not, normal data transmission is not guaranteed.

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

WARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on. Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction. Correctly connect the battery connector. Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder, or

throw the battery into the fire. Also, do not expose it to liquid or strong shock. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explode, ignite, or leak, resulting in injury and fire.

Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws, connector screws, or module fixing screws. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.

7

8

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

CAUTION When connecting an external device with a CPU module or intelligent function module to modify data

of a running programmable controller, configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely. For other forms of control (such as program modification, parameter change, forced output, or operating status change) of a running programmable controller, read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding. Improper operation may damage machines or cause accidents.

Especially, when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device, immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure. To prevent this, configure an interlock circuit in the program, and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure.

Do not disassemble or modify the modules. Doing so may cause failure, malfunction, injury, or a fire. Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or PHS (Personal Handy-phone

System) more than 25cm away in all directions from the programmable controller. Failure to do so may cause malfunction.

Shut off the external power supply (all phases) used in the system before mounting or removing the module. Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction.

Tighten the screws within the specified torque range. Undertightening can cause drop of the component or wire, short circuit, or malfunction. Overtightening can damage the screw and/or module, resulting in drop, short circuit, or malfunction.

After the first use of the product, do not perform each of the following operations more than 50 times (IEC 61131-2/JIS B 3502 compliant). Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction.

Mounting/removing the module to/from the base unit Inserting/removing the extended SRAM cassette or battery-less option cassette to/from the

CPU module Mounting/removing the terminal block to/from the module

After the first use of the product, do not insert/remove the SD memory card to/from the CPU module more than 500 times. Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction.

Do not touch the metal terminals on the back side of the SD memory card. Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module.

Do not touch the integrated circuits on the circuit board of an extended SRAM cassette or a battery- less option cassette. Doing so may cause malfunction or failure of the module.

Do not drop or apply shock to the battery to be installed in the module. Doing so may damage the battery, causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery. If the battery is dropped or any shock is applied to it, dispose of it without using.

[Startup and Maintenance Precautions]

[Operating Precautions]

[Disposal Precautions]

[Transportation Precautions]

CAUTION Startup and maintenance of a control panel must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel

with knowledge of protection against electric shock. Lock the control panel so that only qualified maintenance personnel can operate it.

Before handling the module, touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body. Wearing a grounded antistatic wrist strap is recommended. Failure to discharge the static electricity may cause the module to fail or malfunction.

CAUTION When changing data and operating status, and modifying program of the running programmable

controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module, read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation. Incorrect change or modification may cause system malfunction, damage to the machines, or accidents.

Do not power off the programmable controller or reset the CPU module while the setting values in the buffer memory are being written to the flash ROM in the module. Doing so will make the data in the flash ROM undefined. The values need to be set in the buffer memory and written to the flash ROM again. Doing so also can cause malfunction or failure of the module.

CAUTION When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste. When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations. For

details on battery regulations in EU member states, refer to the MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual.

CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries, follow the transportation regulations. For details on the regulated

models, refer to the MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual. The halogens (such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine), which are contained in a fumigant

used for disinfection and pest control of wood packaging materials, may cause failure of the product. Prevent the entry of fumigant residues into the product or consider other methods (such as heat treatment) instead of fumigation. The disinfection and pest control measures must be applied to unprocessed raw wood.

9

10

CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT (1) MELSEC programmable controller ("the PRODUCT") shall be used in conditions;

i) where any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT, if any, shall not lead to any major or serious accident; and ii) where the backup and fail-safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem, fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT.

(2) The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT, PRODUCT LIABILITY) FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS, PRECAUTIONS, OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USER'S, INSTRUCTION AND/OR SAFETY MANUALS, TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT. ("Prohibited Application") Prohibited Applications include, but not limited to, the use of the PRODUCT in; Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies, and/or any other cases in which the

public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT. Railway companies or Public service purposes, and/or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality

assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User. Aircraft or Aerospace, Medical applications, Train equipment, transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator,

Incineration and Fuel devices, Vehicles, Manned transportation, Equipment for Recreation and Amusement, and Safety devices, handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals, Mining and Drilling, and/or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property.

Notwithstanding the above restrictions, Mitsubishi Electric may in its sole discretion, authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications, provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi Electric and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail-safe, redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required. For details, please contact the Mitsubishi Electric representative in your region.

(3) Mitsubishi Electric shall have no responsibility or liability for any problems involving programmable controller trouble and system trouble caused by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks.

INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controllers. This manual describes the functions and troubleshooting of the relevant product listed below. Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC iQ-R series programmable controller to handle the product correctly. When applying the program examples provided in this manual to an actual system, ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems. Please make sure that the end users read this manual.

Relevant product RJ71GP21-SX, RJ71GP21S-SX, RJ71EN71, RnENCPU

Unless otherwise specified, the buffer memory addresses in this manual are for when using the following: RJ71GP21(S)-SX RJ71EN71 and RnENCPU in which "Port 1 Network Type" is set to "CC-Link IE Control" For the RJ71EN71 and RnENCPU, add the following value to the buffer memory addresses when setting "Port 1 Network Type" to "Ethernet" and "Port 2 Network Type" to "CC-Link IE Control". Address (decimal): 2000000 Address (hexadecimal): 1E8480H

11

12

CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 RELEVANT MANUALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

CHAPTER 1 FUNCTIONS 19 1.1 Cyclic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Data flow and link device assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Link refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Direct access to link devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Cyclic data integrity assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Interlink transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Cyclic transmission punctuality assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Group cyclic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Number of send points extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Reception status when an error occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Cyclic transmission stop and restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

1.2 Transient Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Communications within the same network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Communications with different networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 IP communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Relay using CC-Link IE Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Example of communications using the IP packet transfer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Communication speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

1.4 Interrupt Request to CPU Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 1.5 Loopback Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

When optical fiber cables are used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 When Ethernet cables are used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

1.6 External Power Supply Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 1.7 Redundant System Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 System switching operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 System switching request to the control system CPU module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Functions restricted in a redundant system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Setting example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

CHAPTER 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 74 2.1 Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 2.2 Required Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Station Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Network Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

C O

N TE

N TS

Network Range Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 2.3 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Refresh Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

2.4 Application Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Supplementary Cyclic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Link points extended setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Interrupt Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Transient Transmission Group No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Dynamic Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Parameter Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Event Reception from Other Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Module Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Interlink Transmission Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Redundant System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

CHAPTER 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 102 3.1 Checking with LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 3.2 Checking the Module Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 3.3 Checking the Network Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

When optical fiber cables are used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 When Ethernet cables are used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Link Start/Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

3.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 3.5 List of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 3.6 List of Parameter Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 3.7 Event List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

APPENDICES 157 Appendix 1 Module Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Appendix 2 I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

List of I/O signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Details of I/O signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Appendix 3 Buffer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 List of buffer memory addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Details of buffer memory addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Appendix 6 Dedicated Instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Precautions for dedicated instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Appendix 7 Processing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Link scan time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Cyclic transmission delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Interlink transmission time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Cyclic data holding time when system switching occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Appendix 8 Added and Enhanced Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

13

14

INDEX 214

REVISIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 TRADEMARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

RELEVANT MANUALS

e-Manual refers to the Mitsubishi Electric FA electronic book manuals that can be browsed using a dedicated tool. e-Manual has the following features: Required information can be cross-searched in multiple manuals. Other manuals can be accessed from the links in the manual. The hardware specifications of each part can be found from the product figures. Pages that users often browse can be bookmarked. Sample programs can be copied to an engineering tool.

Manual name [manual number] Description Available form

MELSEC iQ-R CC-Link IE Controller Network User's Manual (Application) [SH-081258ENG] (this manual)

Functions, parameter settings, troubleshooting, and buffer memory of CC-Link IE Controller Network

Print book

e-Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup) [SH-081256ENG]

Specifications, procedures before operation, system configuration, wiring, and communication examples of Ethernet, CC-Link IE Controller Network, and CC-Link IE Field Network

Print book

e-Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R Module Configuration Manual [SH-081262ENG]

The combination of the MELSEC iQ-R series modules, common information on the installation/wiring in the system, and specifications of the power supply module, base unit, SD memory card, and battery

Print book

e-Manual PDF

MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Module Dedicated Instructions) [SH-081976ENG]

Dedicated instructions for the intelligent function modules e-Manual PDF

15

16

TERMS Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following terms.

Term Description Baton pass A control mechanism in which transmission right (token) is passed around the network for data transmission.

Buffer memory Memory in an intelligent function module to store data such as setting values and monitor values. For CPU modules, it refers to memory to store data such as setting values and monitor values of the Ethernet function, or data used for data communication of the multiple CPU system function.

Control CPU A CPU module that controls connected I/O modules and intelligent function modules. In a multiple CPU system, a control CPU can be set for each module.

Control station Only one station that controls the network to which it is connected. Each station's send range for cyclic transmission is assigned to the control station.

Control system A system that controls a redundant system and performs network communications in a redundant system

CPU module (built-in Ethernet port part)

A built-in Ethernet port part of a CPU module (CPU part for the RnENCPU) ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Cyclic transmission A function by which data are periodically exchanged among stations on the same network using link devices (RX, RY, RWw, and RWr)

Dedicated instruction An instruction that simplifies programming for using functions of intelligent function modules

Device A memory of a CPU module to store data. Devices such as X, Y, M, D, and others are provided depending on the intended use.

Engineering tool A tool used for setting up programmable controllers, programming, debugging, and maintenance.

Global label A label that is valid for all the program data when multiple program data are created in the project. There are two types of global label: a module specific label (module label), which is generated automatically by GX Works3, and an optional label, which can be created for any specified device.

I/O master station A station that controls communications by the link devices (LX, LY). Up to two I/O master stations can be set for one network (block 1 and block 2), regardless of the status of control or normal station.

Intelligent function module A module that has functions other than an input or output, such as an A/D converter module and D/A converter module

Link device A device (LB, LW, LX, LY, SB, or SW) in a module and board on CC-Link IE Controller Network.

Link refresh Automatic data transfer between a link device (LB, LW, LX, LY, SB, or SW) of the CC-Link IE Controller Network- equipped module and a device in a CPU module, or a link device (SB or SW) of the CC-Link IE Controller Network- equipped module and a module label in a CPU module. Link refresh is performed in the END processing of the CPU module's sequence scan.

Link scan (link scan time) Time required for all the stations on the network to transmit data. The link scan time depends on data volume and the number of transient transmission requests.

Module label A label that represents one of memory areas (I/O signals and buffer memory areas) specific to each module in a given character string. For the module used, GX Works3 automatically generates this label, which can be used as a global label.

New control system A system that has switched to control system from standby system after system switching

Normal station A station that performs cyclic transmission and transient transmission with the control station and other normal stations

Process CPU (redundant mode) A Process CPU operating in redundant mode. A redundant system is configured with this CPU module. Process control function blocks and the online module change function can be used even in this mode.

Redundant function module A module to configure a redundant system by using it in combination with a process CPU (redundant mode). The redundant function module model name is R6RFM.

Redundant system A system consisting of two systems that have same configuration (CPU module, power supply module, network module, and other modules). Even after an error occurs in one of the two system, the other system takes over the control of the entire system.

Relay station A station that relays data link to other station with mounting more than one network modules on one programmable controller.

Reserved station A station reserved for future use. This station is not actually connected, but counted as a connected station.

RnENCPU (CPU part) A module on the left-hand side of the RnENCPU ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

RnENCPU (network part) A module on the right-hand side of the RnENCPU ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Seamless communication Communication that allows users to access a different kind of networks without having to consider the differences as if data were exchanged within one single network

Shared group number Number that is assigned to a station to allow it to share cyclic data with any given stations. Cyclic data can be shared only with stations of the same group.

Standby system A backup system in a redundant system

System A A system that is set as system A to distinguish two systems in a redundant system. It is used to distinguish connected two systems (system A and system B).

System B A system that is set as system B to distinguish two systems in a redundant system. It is used to distinguish connected two systems (system A and system B).

System switching A function which switches the systems between the control system and the standby system to continue operation of the redundant system when a failure or an error occurs in the control system

Tracking cable An optical fiber cable used to connect two redundant function modules in a redundant system

Transient transmission A function of communication with another station, which is used when requested by a dedicated instruction or the engineering tool

Transient transmission group number

Number that is assigned for transient transmission to any given stations. By specifying a group of stations as transient transmission target, data can be sent to the stations of the same group No.

Term Description

17

18

GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Unless otherwise specified, this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations.

Generic term/abbreviation Description CC-Link IE Controller Network- equipped module

An abbreviation for the RJ71GP21-SX CC-Link IE Controller Network module, the RJ71GP21S-SX CC-Link IE Controller Network module, and the following modules when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used: RJ71EN71 RnENCPU

CC-Link IE Field Network- equipped master/local module

A generic term for the RJ71GF11-T2 CC-Link IE Field Network master/local module and the following modules when the CC-Link IE Field Network function is used: RJ71EN71 RnENCPU

CPU module A generic term for the MELSEC iQ-R series CPU modules

Data link A generic term for cyclic transmission and transient transmission

Ethernet device A generic term for the devices supporting IP communication (such as personal computers)

Ethernet-equipped module A generic term for the following modules when the Ethernet function is used: RJ71EN71 CPU module

I/O module A generic term for the input module, output module, I/O combined module, and interrupt module

MELSECNET/10 An abbreviation for the MELSECNET/10 network system

MELSECNET/H An abbreviation for the MELSECNET/H network system

Network module A generic term for the following modules: Ethernet interface module CC-Link IE Controller Network module Module on CC-Link IE Field Network MELSECNET/H network module MELSECNET/10 network module RnENCPU (network part)

Process CPU A generic term for the R08PCPU, R16PCPU, R32PCPU, and R120PCPU

RAS An abbreviation for Reliability, Availability, and Serviceability. This term refers to the overall usability of automated equipment.

READ A generic term for the JP.READ and GP.READ

RECV A generic term for the JP.RECV and GP.RECV

RECVS A generic term for the G.RECVS and Z.RECVS

REQ A generic term for the J.REQ, JP.REQ, G.REQ, and GP.REQ

RIRD A generic term for the J.RIRD, JP.RIRD, G.RIRD, and GP.RIRD

RIWT A generic term for the J.RIWT, JP.RIWT, G.RIWT, and GP.RIWT

RnENCPU A generic term for the R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, and R120ENCPU

RRUN A generic term for the J.RRUN, JP.RRUN, G.RRUN, GP.RRUN, Z.RRUN, and ZP.RRUN

RSTOP A generic term for the J.RSTOP, JP.RSTOP, G.RSTOP, GP.RSTOP, Z.RSTOP, and ZP.RSTOP

RTMRD A generic term for the J.RTMRD, JP.RTMRD, G.RTMRD, GP.RTMRD, Z.RTMRD, and ZP.RTMRD

RTMWR A generic term for the J.RTMWR, JP.RTMWR, G.RTMWR, GP.RTMWR, Z.RTMWR, and ZP.RTMWR

SEND A generic term for the JP.SEND and GP.SEND

SREAD A generic term for the JP.SREAD and GP.SREAD

SWRITE A generic term for the JP.SWRITE and GP.SWRITE

UINI A generic term for the G.UINI, GP.UINI, Z.UINI, and ZP.UINI

WRITE A generic term for the JP.WRITE and GP.WRITE

ZNRD A generic term for the J.ZNRD and JP.ZNRD

ZNWR A generic term for the J.ZNWR and JP.ZNWR

1

1 FUNCTIONS

1.1 Cyclic Transmission This function allows data to be periodically exchanged among stations on the same network using link devices.

Data flow and link device assignment

Communications using LB and LW This function allows each station to write data to its own send range of a link device (LB, LW) to send them to all other stations on the network. The status data of the link devices (LB, LW) of the control station are stored in the link devices (LB, LW) of each normal station. The status data of the link devices (LB, LW) of normal stations are stored in the link devices (LB, LW) of the control station and the link devices (LB, LW) of other normal stations.

The device of the CPU module on sending side turns on. The status data of the device of the CPU module on sending side are stored in the link devices (LB, LW) of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped

module by link refresh. The status data of the link devices (LB, LW) are stored in the link devices (LB, LW) of the receiving-side CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module by

link refresh. The status data of the link devices (LB, LW) are stored in the devices of the CPU module on receiving side.

END

LB

END

B B

LW

END

LB

LW

LB

LW

LB

LW

END

CPU module Device or global label

Sequence scan

Control stationCPU module Device or global label

Sequence scan

Send request

Station No.1

Range of the station No.1 sending data

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.4

Device or global label

Sequence scan

Range of the station No.1 sending data

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.4

Normal station

Station No.2

Range of the station No.2 sending data

Station No.3

Station No.4

Range of the station No.2 sending data

Station No.3

Station No.4

Normal station

Station No.3

Station No.2

Range of the station No.3 sending data

Station No.4

Station No.2

Range of the station No.3 sending data

Station No.4

Normal station

Station No.4

Station No.2

Station No.3

Range of the station No.4 sending data

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.3

Range of the station No.4 sending data

Link scan

Device or global label

Sequence scan

Link scan

Area where data is sent to other stations

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 19

20

Communications using LX and LY This function is used for communication between the I/O master station that controls LX and LY and another station on a one- to-one (1:1) basis. Up to two I/O master stations can be set for one network (block 1 and block 2), regardless of the status of control or normal station. The link input (LX) is used to receive the information input from each station in a block, and the link output (LY) is used to send the output information of the I/O master station.

The status data of the link output (LY) of the I/O master station is output to the link input (LX) of another station, and the status data of the link output (LY) of another station is stored in the link input (LX) of the I/O master station.

Output from the I/O master station

Input from another station

The device of the CPU module turns on. The status data of the device of the CPU module are stored in the link output (LY) of the I/O master station by link refresh. The status data of the link output (LY) of the I/O master station are stored in the link input (LX) of another station by link scan. The status data of the link input (LX) of another station are stored in the device of the CPU module by link refresh.

The device of the CPU module turns on. The status data of the device of the CPU module are stored in the link output (LY) of another station by link refresh. The status data of the link output (LY) of another station are stored in the link input (LX) of the I/O master station by link scan. The status data of the link input (LX) of the I/O master station are stored in the device of the CPU module by link refresh.

LX

LY

LY LY LX

LX

LX

LY

LY LX

Block 1 I/O master station

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.3)

Block 2 I/O master station

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.3)

END

LX

END

Y

LY

LY

LY

END

LY

END

LX

LX

LX

Y

X

X

CPU module Device or global label

Sequence scan

I/O master stationCPU module

Device or global label

Sequence scan

Output instruction

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.4

Another station

Station No.2 Another station

Station No.3

Station No.3

Another station

Station No.4

Link refreshLink refresh

Station No.4

Station No.2

Device or global label

Sequence scan

Device or global label

Sequence scan

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.4

Station No.3

Link refreshLink refresh

Station No.4

Station No.2

Link scan

Area where data is sent to other stations Output instruction

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission

1

Setting method Assign the link devices under "Network Range Assignment" in "Required Settings". ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment) The link refresh is assigned under "Refresh Setting" in "Basic Settings". ( Page 84 Refresh Setting)

Link refresh This function automatically transfers data between the link devices of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and the devices of the CPU module.

Concept of the link refresh range (number of points) The area range set under "Refresh Setting" in "Basic Settings" and also specified under "Network Range Assignment" in "Required Settings" is executed by link refresh.

Shortening the link refresh time and transmission delay time The link refresh time and transmission delay time can be shortened by reducing the number of link refresh points to the CPU module. The following methods can be used to reduce the number of the link refresh points. In "Refresh Setting" under "Basic Settings", set only the link devices used in the CPU module as the link refresh range.

( Page 84 Refresh Setting) Directly access infrequently used link devices from the program, and remove the corresponding settings from the link

refresh range. ( Page 23 Direct access to link devices)

Setting method Assign the link refresh under "Refresh Setting" in "Basic Settings". ( Page 84 Refresh Setting)

(1) Range set under "Refresh Setting" in "Basic Settings" (2) Actual link refresh range (3) Range set under "Network Range Assignment" in "Required Settings"

LB

LW

LX

LY

CPU module

Device or global label

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Link device

Link refresh

(1)

(2) (3)

CPU module

Device or global label

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Link device

Link refresh

Link refresh

Link refresh

Empty

Empty

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 21

22

Precautions Latched devices of the CPU module If data in latched devices of the CPU module are cleared to zero on a program when the CPU module is turned off and on or reset, the data may be output without being cleared to zero, depending on the timing of the link scan and link refresh. Execute the actions listed in the table below not to output the data in the latched devices of the CPU module.

*1 For the initial device value setting of the CPU module, refer to the following. GX Works3 Operating Manual

CPU module device How to disable the setting Latch relay (L), file register (R, ZR) Use the initial device value of the CPU module to clear the device to zero.*1

CPU module device within the latch range Delete all the latch range settings specified in "Latch Interval Operation Setting" under "Device Latch Interval Setting" in "Memory/Device Setting" of "CPU Parameter".

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission

1

Direct access to link devices This function allows direct access to the link devices of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module from the program. Specify a link device (LB, LW, LX, LY, SB, SW) as the link direct device (J\) for direct access.

Specification method Specify the network number and the link device of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module for reading or writing.

*1 When the link relay (LB) (B8000 to BFFFF) or link register (LW) (W20000 to W3FFFF) is accessed by the link direct device, use the corresponding CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module or CPU modules. Firmware versions that support the link points extended setting (extension of points for CC-Link IE Controller Network) are as shown below. In addition, set "Extended Mode (iQ-R Series Mode)" of "Link Direct Device Setting" in "CPU Parameter". Any link relay (LB) (B0 to B7FFF) or link register (LW) (W0 to W1FFFF) can be accessed. The RJ71GP21-SX or RJ71GP21S-SX with a firmware version of "36" or later The RJ71EN71 or RnENCPU (network part) with a firmware version of "39" or later CPU module: User's manual (Application) for the CPU module to be used

Ex.

(1) Network number: 1 to 239 (2) Link relay (LB): B0 to BFFFF*1

Link register (LW): W0 to W3FFFF*1

Link input (LX): X0 to X1FFF Link output (LY): Y0 to Y1FFF Link special relay (SB): SB0 to SB1FF Link special register (SW): SW0 to SW1FF

J

(1) (2)

\

LB0 LB0

LB100 LB100

LW100 LW100

LW200 LW200

1000 1000

11FF 11FF

X Y LX LY LX LY

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Actual I/O

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped moduleSend request

J1\B100

J1\B0

Send request

MOV K20 J1\W100

= J1\W200 K300

Output instruction

J1\X1100

J1\Y1000

CPU module

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.2

Cyclic transmission

Link refresh

Network No.1

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 23

24

Readable and writable range Data can be read or written between the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and CPU module mounted on the same base unit.

Read All the link devices of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module can be specified. ( Page 23 Specification method)

Write The range that satisfies all of the following conditions can be specified. Area where data is sent to other stations and outside the link refresh range ( Page 19 Data flow and link device

assignment) Within the link device range of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module ( Page 23 Specification method)

(1) Out of the link refresh range (2) Area where data is sent to other stations (3) Area for receiving the data from other stationsB LB

(2)

(1)

(3)

CPU module CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

This area is writable.

Link refresh

Link refresh

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission

1

When writing data to the area in the link refresh range, directly access the link device and write the same data in the device of the CPU module. Bad example (Only direct access to the link refresh target) Link refresh overwrites the value.

Good example (In addition to direct access, writing the same data to the device of the CPU module) The value written by direct access is reflected.

LW

LW100

W

300W100

MOV K20 J1\W100

20 300

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped moduleCPU module

Link refresh

LW100W100

LW

20

W

20

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped moduleCPU module

MOV K20 J1\W100

MOV K20 W100

Link refresh

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 25

26

Differences from link refresh

*1 For actual values, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Module Dedicated Instructions)

Shortening the link refresh time and transmission delay time Shortening the link refresh time Remove infrequently used link devices from the link refresh range, and directly read or write the corresponding data using link direct devices. This function reduces the number of the link refresh points to the CPU module, resulting in a shorter link refresh time. ( Page 21 Link refresh)

Shortening the transmission delay time Because the link direct device allows direct reading or writing of data to the link devices of the CC-Link IE Controller Network- equipped module at the time of the instruction execution, the transmission delay time can be shortened.

Link refresh is executed in END processing of the sequence scan of the CPU module.

Precautions Cyclic data integrity assurance Direct access to link devices does not provide station-based block data assurance. Use 32-bit data assurance, or if cyclic data of more than 32 bits needs to be assured, use interlock programs. ( Page 27 Cyclic data integrity assurance)

Mounting multiple modules of the same network number For the precautions on mounting multiple CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules of the same network number, refer to the following. Page 38 Precautions

Item Access method

Link refresh Direct access Number of steps 1 step 2 steps

Processing speed*1 High speed Low speed

Cyclic data integrity assurance Available Not available

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission

1

Cyclic data integrity assurance This function assures the cyclic data integrity in units of 32 bits or station-based units. The following three methods are available for cyclic data integrity assurance. : Assured, : Not assured

Link scans are performed asynchronously with link refresh. Therefore, when the following cyclic data of 32 bits or more are handled, new and old data may be mixed in units of 16 bits depending on the link refresh timing. Floating-point data Present value or command speed value of a positioning module

Method Description Availability

Link refresh Direct access to link devices

32-bit data assurance Assures data in units of 32 bits. Data is automatically assured by satisfying the assignment conditions of link devices.

Assurance of data of more than 32 bits

Station-based block data assurance

Assures data in station-based units. Data is assured by enabling the station-based block data assurance in the parameter setting.

Interlock program Assures data of more than 32 bits. Data is assured by performing interlocks on programs.

END0 END0 END0 END0Sequence scan

Link scan

Link refresh Link refresh Link refresh

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 27

28

32-bit data assurance The link relay (LB) and link register (LW) data can be assured in units of 32 bits. When LB and LW are set with the following four conditions met, 32-bit data assurance is automatically assured. The start device number of LB is a multiple of 20H. The number of points assigned per station in LB is a multiple of 20H. The start device number of LW is a multiple of 2. The number of points assigned per station in LW is a multiple of 2. LB and LW are specified under "Network Range Assignment" in "Required Settings" of the control station. ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment)

Data assurance at the time of link refresh Link-refreshing the link devices that satisfy the conditions for 32-bit data assurance will ensure the integrity of 32-bit data.

Data integrity assurance at the time of direct access to link devices Directly accessing link devices that satisfy the conditions for 32-bit data assurance will ensure the integrity of 32-bit data.

0H 1H 2H 3H 4H 5H

6H 7H

LW

2 words (32 bits)

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Device or global label CPU module

Link refresh

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

0H 1H 2H 3H 4H 5H

6H 7H

0H 1H 2H 3H 4H 5H

6H 7H

BMOV J1\W0 W0 K8

Link register (LW)

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Link register (W) CPU module

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

2 words (32 bits)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission

1

Station-based block data assurance Integrity of the cyclic data is assured for each station by handshake between the CPU module and CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module for a link refresh.

Setting Set station-based block data assurance under "Supplementary Cyclic Settings" in "Application Settings" of the control station. ( Page 90 Supplementary Cyclic Settings) Once this setting is enabled on the control station, integrity of the data for all stations is assured for each station.

Access to link devices During a link refresh, data are assured for each station as shown below.

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.4

Data assurance

Data assurance

Data assurance

Data assurance

Data assurance

Data assurance

Data assurance

Data assurance

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.4

Link device

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Device or global label CPU module

Link refresh

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 29

30

Interlock program Data of more than 32 bits can be assured with the station-based block data assurance setting disabled. Handshake using link relay (LB) data can prevent data inconsistency of the link register (LW) because link relay (LB) is sent after link register (LW).

Ex.

The following shows a program example of when 'uData' (W0 to W2) of the control station is sent to 'uData' (W0 to W2) of the normal station. Handshake is performed by turning on 'bHandShake1' (B0) in the control station and 'bHandShake2' (B100) upon completion of storing send data.

Data flow

Program Sending station: Control station (station No.1)

Classification Description Label to be defined Define global labels as shown below:

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Sending station

Receiving station

SET B0

B0LB0LB0

LW0LW0

LW100LW100

LB100

B0

W0

W100

W0

W100

B100 B100LB100

B0

Cyclic transmission

Link refresh

Send request

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.1 Station No.2

Station No.1 Station No.2

Station No.1 Station No.2

CPU module CPU moduleControl station Normal station Send data (W) Receive data (W)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission

1

Receiving station: Normal station (station No.2)

Program flow

Classification Description Label to be defined Define global labels as shown below:

Sending station (0)

The 'bSendRequest' (M0) is turned on.

Sending station (0)

The contents of 'uOutputData' (D0 to D2) is stored in 'uData' (W0 to W2).

Sending station (0)

Upon completion of storage in 'uData' (W0 to W2), 'bHandShake1' (B0) is turned on.

Receiving station (0)

Link relay (LB) is sent through cyclic transmission and 'bHandShake1 (B0) is turned on.

Receiving station (0)

The contents of 'uData' (W0 to W2) is stored in 'uOutputData' (D100 to D102).

Receiving station (0)

Upon completion of storage in 'uOutputData' (D100 to D102), 'bHandShake2' (B100) is turned on.

Sending station (18)

When 'bHandShake2' (B100) in the receiving station is turned on, 'bHandShake1' (B0) is turned off.

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 31

32

Interlink transmission This function transfers data in the link devices (LB, LW)of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module to another network module on a relay station.

Setting method Set interlink transmission in "Interlink Transmission Settings" in "Application Settings". ( Page 97 Interlink Transmission Settings)

Precautions For the precautions, refer to the following. Page 97 Interlink Transmission Settings

RX

RY

LB

Relay station

Interlink transmissions

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped moduleNetwork module

Network No.1 Network No.2

Data of network No.2 Data of network No.1

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission

1

Cyclic transmission punctuality assurance The link scan time is constant using the following methods.

While this function is used to keep the link scan time constant, the transmission delay time is not kept constant by this function. The transmission delay time is affected by a factor such as a prolonged sequence scan time.

Specification of the number of transient transmissions When the fluctuation in link scan time needs to be eliminated, the link scan time can be kept constant by performing a specified number of transient transmissions during one link scan at each station. When the actual number of transient transmissions is less than the specified one: Dummy data is sent to cover the shortfall. When the actual number of transient transmissions exceeds the specified one: They are divided and transmitted in several

link scans.

Ex.

When the specified number is 2

Constant link scan If the network status is unstable, the link scan time can be kept constant by specifying the link scan time at the control station to allow for possible fluctuations in the link scan time.

Setting method Set cyclic transmission punctuality assurance under "Supplementary Cyclic Settings" in "Application Settings" of the control station. ( Page 90 Supplementary Cyclic Settings)

Method Description Advantage Disadvantage Specification of the number of transient transmissions

Specify the number of transient transmissions within one link scan.

The link scan time can be minimized while it is kept constant.

If the network status is unstable, the link scan time may not be kept constant.

Constant link scan

Specify the link scan time. Even If the network status is unstable or the number of transient transmissions varies, the link scan time can be kept constant.

If the actual link scan time is longer than the link scan time specified, the operation is performed based on the actual link scan time.

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.4)

Cyclic transmission

Transient transmission (dummy transmission)

Transient transmission

Request

Response

Link scan time is constant since each station sends a specified number of transient transmissions.

Link scan time

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 33

34

Group cyclic transmission This function is used to divide the stations within the network into groups and specify the stations that share cyclic data (shared group). This setting allows cyclic data to be shared among the stations having the same shared group number and not to be received from those having a different shared group number. Stations having no shared group number assigned will share cyclic data with all stations.

Ex.

The station (station No.1) having no shared group number assigned will share cyclic data with all stations. The stations (station No.2 to 5) having a shared group number assigned will share cyclic data with the stations of the same shared group number and the station without a shared group number (station No.1).

Use this function for the following purposes. All stations need to share the data of the station controlling production lines. Data sharing is not desired between the stations that control different machines. Since each station receives only the cyclic data from any given stations, the number of link refresh points can be reduced, resulting in a shorter link refresh time.

Setting method Set the group cyclic transmission under "Network Range Assignment" in "Required Settings" of the control station. ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment)

LB0

Shared group No.1 Shared group No.2

Link relay (LB)

Station No.1 send range

Station No.5

Station No.4

Station No.1

Station No.5

Station No.4 send range

Station No.1

Station No.5 send range

Station No.4

Station No.3

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.3

Station No.2 send range

Station No.1

Station No.3 send range

Station No.2

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.5)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission

1

Number of send points extension The number of send points for CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules can be extended by the following methods. Page 35 Number of send points extension by using extended mode Page 36 Number of send points extension by using the link points extended setting Page 37 Number of send points extension by using multiple modules The number of link device points on parameter setting details are the following.

The number of send points extension by using extended mode or the link points extended setting allows more send points to be set than the number of send points extension by using multiple modules. Therefore, when extended the number of send points, to use extended mode or the link points extended setting is recommended. However, use the number of send points extension by using multiple modules for the following purposes. To add a station that requires more than the number of 16K send points in a network comprising CC-Link IE

Controller Network modules that do not support extended mode or the link points extended setting. To replace an existing CC-Link IE Controller Network module that is configured with the number of send

points extension by using multiple modules with a MELSEC iQ-R series CC-Link IE Controller Network- equipped module without changing programs

Number of send points extension by using extended mode This function allows a CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module to be set to the extended mode using an engineering tool so that the number of send points per station will be extended to a maximum of 32K points for the link relay (LB) and 128K points for the link register (LW) in one module. In addition, when "Link points extended setting" is set to "Extend" in extended mode, the number of send points per station will be extended to a maximum of 64K points for the link relay (LB) and 256K points for the link register (LW) in one module. For details, refer to the following. Page 35 Number of send points extension

Setting method Select "Ext. Mode Control Station" or "Ext. Mode Normal Station" in "Station Type" of "Required Settings" to extend the number of send points.

Precautions Set both the control station and normal stations within the same network to the extended mode. Do not mix network of stations having the extended mode enabled and having it disabled.

Parameter setting details Number of link device points

Station type Link points extended setting

LB/LW Maximum number of link points per network

Number of send points per station

Control station Normal station

Not to Extend LB 32K points (32768 points, 4K bytes) 16K points (16384 points, 2K bytes)

LW 128K points (131072 points, 256K bytes) 16K points (16384 points, 32K bytes)

Extend LB 64K points (65536 points, 8K bytes) 16K points (16384 points, 2K bytes)

LW 256K points (262144 points, 512K bytes) 16K points (16384 points, 32K bytes)

Ext. Mode Control Station Ext. Mode Normal Station

Not to Extend LB 32K points (32768 points, 4K bytes) 32K points (32768 points, 4K bytes)

LW 128K points (131072 points, 256K bytes) 128K points (131072 points, 256K bytes)

Extend LB 64K points (65536 points, 8K bytes) 64K points (65536 points, 8K bytes)

LW 256K points (262144 points, 512K bytes) 256K points (262144 points, 512K bytes)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 35

36

Number of send points extension by using the link points extended setting This function allows a CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module to be set to "Extend" of "Link points extended setting" using an engineering tool so that the maximum number of link points per network will be extended to 64K points for the link relay (LB) and 256K points for the link register (LW) in one network. For details, refer to the following. Page 35 Number of send points extension

Setting method Set "Extend" of "Link points extended setting" on "Application Settings" to extend the maximum number of link points per network.

Precautions When the link points extended setting is used, set "Extend" of "Link points extended setting" on both the control station and

normal stations within the same network. Do not mix network of stations setting both "Extend" and "Not to Extend". Do not mix network of stations that is unavailable for the link points extended setting. When "Link points extended setting" is set to "Extend" and the extended link device is specified by the link direct access,

set "Extended Mode (iQ-R Series Mode)" of "Link Direct Device Setting" in "CPU Parameter".

Combination with other functions The following function can also be extended the setting range. Link refresh Interlink transmission Interrupt request to CPU module

Supported CPU modules For CPU modules that support the link points extended setting (extension of points for CC-Link IE Controller Network), refer to the following. User's manual (Application) for the CPU module to be used

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission

1

Number of send points extension by using multiple modules This function increases the number of send points by mounting multiple CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules of the same network number with one CPU module. Mounting one additional module can increase the number of send points per station by 16K points for both the link relay (LB) and the link register (LW). Up to eight modules can be mounted on one CPU module, allowing the number of send points per station to be extended up to 32K points for the link relay (LB) and 128K points for the link register (LW).*1

*1 Number of send points cannot exceed the maximum number of link points per network. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Ex.

When increasing the number of send points by mounting two CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules (LW) Link relay (LB): Up to 32K points Link register (LW): Up to 32K points

Network number and station number setting Set the same network number to the modules (1st to 8th module) for which to extend the number of send points. Set a different station number to each station. ( Page 74 Required Settings)

Network range assignment Set the send range of each station in LB and LW under "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings" of the control station. ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment)

LWW LW

CPU module

16K max.

16K max.

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2) Normal station

(station No.3) Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.5)

Control station (station No.1)

Control station (station No.1)

Control station (station No.1)

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.5)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.5)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.5)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 37

38

Refresh settings Configure the refresh settings so that within the own station send range of the CPU module, the range of up to 16K points can be link-refreshed to the first CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and the range to be extended can be link- refreshed to the second and subsequent CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Target module [Module Parameter] [Basic Settings] [Refresh Setting]

Ex.

When the own station send range is link-refreshed to the station No.1 and 2

Network range assignment

Refresh settings of the control station (station No.1)

Refresh settings of the normal station (station No.2)

Precautions When mounting multiple modules with the same network number and using a function, such as the link direct device, that specifies a CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module by the network number, the execution target will be as listed below.

Item Description Link direct devices The module mounted on the slot with the smallest slot number in the base unit is targeted.

Dedicated instruction The module mounted on the slot with the smallest slot number in the base unit executes the dedicated instruction.

LB/LWB/W LB/LW

CPU module

Own station send range

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.5)

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.5)

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.5)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission

1

Reception status when an error occurs When there is a data link faulty station on the CC-Link IE Controller Network, the link device statuses are as follows. Normally operating station: The data received from the faulty station holds immediately before the error. Faulty station: The data received from the other stations holds immediately before the error.

Cyclic transmission stop and restart This function is used to stop the cyclic transmission during debugging and other operations. (Data reception from other stations and data sending from the own station are stopped.) Also, the stopped cyclic transmission is restarted. Transient transmission does not stop. Cyclic transmission is stopped and restarted using the link start/stop of the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. ( Page 135 Procedure when optical fiber cables are used, Page 136 Procedure when Ethernet cables are used)

LB/LW

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Station No.1 receive range

Station No.2 send range

Station No.3 receive range

Station No.1 receive range

Station No.2 receive range

Station No.3 send range

Faulty station

Data transferred

Data held

Station No.1 send range

Station No.2 receive range

Station No.3 receive range

1 FUNCTIONS 1.1 Cyclic Transmission 39

40

1.2 Transient Transmission This function allows communications with other stations when a request is made by a method such as a dedicated instruction and engineering tool. Communications with different networks is also possible.

Communications within the same network This function performs the transient transmission to other stations using dedicated instructions and the engineering tool. ( MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Module Dedicated Instructions))

Ex.

Accessing a programmable controller of another station using the dedicated instruction (READ instruction)

READ

1234H 1234H

1

3 2

Command

Device

Channel 2 Channel 1

Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel 10

Device

CPU module CPU moduleControl station Normal station

1 FUNCTIONS 1.2 Transient Transmission

1

Communications with different networks This function performs the transient transmission seamlessly to stations on different networks using dedicated instructions and the engineering tool.

Communications can be made with stations up to eight networks apart (number of relay stations: 7).

When the networks consist of only MELSEC iQ-R series Communication paths are automatically set for communication with the following networks of MELSEC iQ-R series. Ethernet CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link IE Field Network

Setting method Check that "Dynamic Routing" in "Application Settings" is set to "Enable".

Communication paths are automatically set, but they can also be manually set. ( Page 41 When the networks consist of MELSEC iQ-R series and other series)

Communication paths cannot be automatically set to Ethernet-equipped modules connected via a router. Set communication paths manually for such modules. ( Page 41 When the networks consist of MELSEC iQ-R series and other series)

When the networks consist of MELSEC iQ-R series and other series Setting communication paths allows communication with the following networks configured with modules other than MELSEC iQ-R series. Ethernet CC-Link IE Controller Network CC-Link IE Field Network MELSECNET/H MELSECNET/10

Setting method Set communication paths in "Routing Setting" of "CPU Parameter". ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

CC-Link IE Field Network

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Network No.3 Network No.2

Network No.1

(Relay station)

Engineering tool

Ethernet

1 FUNCTIONS 1.2 Transient Transmission 41

42

When the networks contain a redundant system When the communication paths are automatically set, the paths are updated if system switching occurs in a redundant

system on the paths. During update of the communication paths, communications may be interrupted or data may be lost because the paths are temporarily undetermined. If an error occurs in communications, resend data from the request source.

When the request source is a redundant system and the communication paths are automatically set, perform the transient transmission from the control system. When performing the transient transmission from the standby system, set "Routing Setting" of "CPU Parameter".

When the request destination is a redundant system and the communication paths are automatically set, specify the control system station as the destination. When specifying the standby system as the request destination, set "Routing Setting" of "CPU Parameter".

When relaying a redundant system and setting the communication paths manually, set the control system station as a relay station in "Routing Setting" of "CPU Parameter". If system switching occurs, the relay station needs to be changed to a station in the new control system using the RTWRITE instruction.

1 FUNCTIONS 1.2 Transient Transmission

1

Communication test Communication test checks if transient transmission data can be properly routed from the own station to the communication target. Take the following system configuration as an example of communication test procedure.

Window when optical fiber cables are used 1. Open the "Communication Test" window and enter values for "Target Station" and "Communication Data Setting".

[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics (Optical Cable)] or [CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics (Twisted Pair Cable)] [Communication Test] button

2. Click the [Execute Test] button to execute the communication test. If an error occurs, take actions according to the error message.

Window when Ethernet cables are used

Communication target

Own station (request source)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

CC-Link IE Controller Network

CC-Link IE Field Network

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.4

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.4

Station No.1

(Relay station 1)

Station No.2

Station No.3

(Relay station 2)

Station No.3

Network No.1 Network No.3

Network No.2

1 FUNCTIONS 1.2 Transient Transmission 43

44

Precautions When a relay sending station is set to "Target Station", only an error code appears without an error message. Set a relay

receiving station to "Target Station".

When a station mounted on the same base unit (main base unit and extension base unit) as the own station is set to "Target Station", only an error code appears without an error message. Set a station mounted on the different base unit to "Target Station".

When the request source is a redundant system and the communication path has automatically been set, execute a communication test from the control system. If a communication test is executed from the standby system, it may complete with an error.

When the request destination is a redundant system and the communication path has automatically been set, specify the control system station for "Target Station". If the standby system is set for the access destination station, a communication test may complete with an error.

Own station (request source)

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.1

Relay receiving station

Relay sending station

Station No.2

Network No.1 Network No.2

1 FUNCTIONS 1.2 Transient Transmission

1

1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function This function enables communications using the specified IP address over CC-Link IE Controller Network. For example, a personal computer can communicate with the FTP server. With this function, two networks of CC-Link IE Controller Network and Ethernet are not required, resulting in reduced wiring cost.

The data that are communicated using the IP packet transfer function are communicated separately by the link scan of the CC-Link IE Controller Network. Because of this, the speed of communications using the IP packet transfer function is slower than the speed of communications with the Ethernet line. ( Page 56 Communication speed)

Ethernet

Two networks were required.

Only CC-Link IE Controller Network is required to perform communications using an IP address.

CC-Link IE Controller Network

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Conventional way

When the IP packet transfer function is used

Ethernet communications (IP packet transfer)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function 45

46

System configuration Connect an Ethernet device to an Ethernet-equipped module.

Setting To use the IP packet transfer function, the following items need to be set.

When the Ethernet device is a personal computer (only Ethernet devices having the route command, such as Microsoft Windows), it is recommended to set the gateway address using the route command. If the gateway address is set in the default gateway, packets not related to the IP packet transfer are also transmitted through the CPU module. Consequently, the service processing of the CPU module drops under heavy load, causing other service processings to be slow or other problems.

After the setting is completed, execute the IP communication test to check for an error in the communication path. ( Page 49 IP communication test)

Ethernet device gateway address setting Set the IP address of the Ethernet-equipped module connected to an Ethernet device in the gateway address of the Ethernet device used.

IP address setting of the Ethernet-equipped module ( Page 48 Setting in the Ethernet-equipped module) Setting of the network number and station number of the RJ71EN71 or the RnENCPU (network part) connected to the Ethernet device

When the RJ71EN71 or the RnENCPU (network part) is set for the Ethernet-equipped module connected to the Ethernet device, set "Communications by Network No./Station No." in the module parameter of the Ethernet to "Enable".

IP packet transfer setting ( Page 48 Setting in the Ethernet-equipped module) This setting is required for the IP packet to be passed between an Ethernet-equipped module and a CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

IP address setting of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module ( Page 48 Setting in the control station) Routing parameter setting

When modules other than MELSEC iQ-R series exist in the communication route, communication route setting is required. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Ethernet Ethernet

Ethernet device (request source device)

Ethernet device (request destination device)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

, , , , , , , , ,

EthernetEthernet : Communication route

Ethernet device (request source device)

Ethernet device (request destination device)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function

1

Rules for the IP address setting IP addresses specified for the IP packet transfer function need to satisfy the following rules.

*1 Set the numbers according to the range applicable to the Ethernet device used. The range may not apply depending on the Ethernet device. Check the specifications of the Ethernet device used. Use the same numbers for the first and second octets of the IP addresses of the request source device, request destination device, and modules between them.

For the IP addresses of the Ethernet-equipped modules, set a number between 1 and 239 for the third octet and a number between 1 and 120 for the fourth octet. The network number of the own station is automatically assigned to the third octet of the IP address of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. The station number of the own station is automatically assigned to the fourth octet of the IP address of the master/local module.

Use the same number for the third octet (network number) of the IP addresses of an Ethernet device and a Ethernet-equipped module connected to the Ethernet device.

Do not use the third octet (network number) of the IP address same as that of other network modules and other CPU modules using the IP packet transfer function.

Device to be set Setting range of the IP address

First and second octets Third octet Fourth octet Ethernet device

0.0 to 223.255*1

(Same numbers for the request source device, request destination device, and modules between them)

, , 1 to 239*1

(Same number for the Ethernet device and the Ethernet-equipped module)

1 to 120*1 Ethernet-equipped module connected to the Ethernet device

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

, Automatically set (network number of the own station) 1 to 239

Automatically set (Own station's station No.) 1 to 120

Ethernet-equipped module on the communication path (not connected to an Ethernet device)

IP address setting not required

192 . 168 . 10 . 36

The first and second octets (network addresses)

192 . 168 . 10 . 36

The third octet

The fourth octet

192.168.10.11 192.168. 10.36

192.168.2.1 192.168.7.18

192.168. 2.8

Ethernet device (request source device)

Network No.10 Network No.2

Ethernet- equipped module

Control station

(station No.1)

Ethernet- equipped module

Normal station

(station No.8)

Normal station

(station No.18)

IP address setting not required

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function 47

48

*2 Do not use the same network numbers for those of network modules other than the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

When setting the IP address in each device, do not use the IP addresses already used for other devices.

Setting method For a communication example, refer to the following. Page 54 Example of communications using the IP packet transfer function

Setting in the Ethernet-equipped module 1. Set the IP address of the Ethernet-equipped module in the following item.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] Target module [Module Parameter] [Basic Settings] [Own Node Settings] [IP Address]

Follow the rules to set the IP address. ( Page 47 Rules for the IP address setting)

2. Change the following setting to "Use".

[Navigation window] [Parameter] Target module [Module Parameter] [Application Settings] [IP Packet Transfer Setting]

Setting in the control station 1. Set the IP address of the control station in the following item.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Target module [Module Parameter] [Application Settings] [IP Address]

Follow the rules to set the IP address. ( Page 47 Rules for the IP address setting)

Setting in the normal stations The IP address setting is not required for the normal stations. The same network address as the control station is automatically assigned to the first and second octets. The network number of the own station is assigned to the third octet, and the station number of the own station is assigned to the fourth octet.

Routing parameter setting When modules other than MELSEC iQ-R series exist in the communication route, set routing parameters. To set routing parameters, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

192.168.10.1

192.168.21.2192.168.10.2

Ethernet Ethernet

Ethernet*2

192.168.21.1

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Do not use the same network numbers for those highlighted.

Network No.10 Network No.21Network No.2

Network No.32

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function

1

IP communication test This function checks whether no error occurs in the communication path within CC-Link IE Controller Network when the IP packet transfer function is used. The following can be checked using the IP communication test: Cables are properly connected on the communication path. Parameters related to the IP packet transfer function, such as an IP address and routing parameters, are correctly set on

the communication path. All the CPU modules and CC-Link IE Controller Network modules on the communication path support the IP packet transfer

function. The following system configuration is used to explain the procedure of the IP communication test. The IP communication test allows the communication paths in the dotted line above to be checked.

The IP communication test cannot be executed if the engineering tool is connected to the RJ71EN71 or the RnENCPU (network part). Use one of the following methods to check whether no error occurs in the communication path. Directly connect using the Ethernet and execute a PING test in the Ethernet diagnostics. ( MELSEC iQ-

R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)) Execute a PING from the Ethernet device connected.

1. Open the "IP Communication Test" window. Enter the IP address of the CPU module 2 or the normal station (station No.2) connected to the request destination device in "Communication Target".

[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics (Optical Cable)] [IP Communication Test] button

2. Click on the [Execute Test] button to execute the test. When the test is completed, the route to the device set in "Communication Target" is displayed on the underside of the window. If the test fails, click the [Details] button in the "Error Information" area to check the error information.

192.168.1.1 192.168.10.1

Ethernet device (request destination device)

Network No.1 Network No.10

CPU module 1: 192.168.1.10 Control station (station No.1): 192.168.2.1

CPU module 2: 192.168.10.10 Normal station (station No.2): 192.168.2.2

Network No.2

Ethernet device (request source device)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function 49

50

If the cause cannot be identified from the error information after the IP communication test is executed, or communications cannot be performed even though the IP communication test is completed successfully, follow the troubleshooting instructions (on when the IP packet transfer function is used) and take corrective actions. ( Page 142 When IP communications cannot be performed using the IP packet transfer function)

Up to 127 levels of modules can be connected when the IP communication test is executed. When an Ethernet device (request destination device) is connected to an Ethernet-equipped module, the

communication path to the Ethernet-equipped module connected to the Ethernet device (request destination device) or CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module can be checked using the IP communication test. Setting the IP address of the Ethernet device in "Communication Target" on the "IP Communication Test" window causes an error. (Error code of the CPU module: 4A2AH)

Precautions Communications cannot be performed via modules that do not support the IP packet transfer function such as MELSECNET/ H. Only an error code appears without any information displayed in "Error Information".

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function

1

Relay using CC-Link IE Field Network The IP packet transfer function can be used through a relay from CC-Link IE Field Network to CC-Link IE Controller Network.

When using the IP packet transfer function on CC-Link IE Field Network, refer to the following. User's manual for the CC-Link IE Field Network used

EthernetEthernet

Ethernet Ethernet

CC-Link IE Controller Network

CC-Link IE Field Network Relay station

Request source

Request destination 2Request destination 3

Request destination 1

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function 51

52

Precautions

Support for the IP packet transfer function MELSEC iQ-R series modules support the IP packet transfer function from the first release. To check whether other modules support the IP packet transfer function, refer to the following. User's manual for the module used

Using different networks Communications cannot be performed via modules that do not support the IP packet transfer function such as MELSECNET/ H.

Communications before a baton pass is established (D LINK LED off) The IP packet transfer function can be used after a baton pass was established. If communications are performed before that, a timeout error occurs in an Ethernet device (request source device). Whether the baton pass is established in the own station can be checked on the D LINK LED.

Precautions when using the UDP communication Using UDP may reduce the reliability of data communications compared to TCP, causing a problem, such as data missing and changed order of data receiving. If any problem occurs, change the protocol to TCP.

Communications of Broadcast and Multicast Communications of Broadcast and Multicast cannot be transferred using the IP packet transfer function. Use Unicast (identifying a single request destination) instead.

Precautions when configuring a multiple CPU system

Set a CPU module connected to an Ethernet device as a control CPU of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module performing the IP packet transfer.

Any CPU module in a relay station on CC-Link IE Controller Network can be served as a control CPU of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module transferring the IP packet.

EthernetEthernet

Ethernet

Ethernet device (request source device)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Control

Ethernet device (request destination device)CPU module connected to

an Ethernet device CPU module on CC-Link IE Controller Network (No restrictions on the control CPU)

Ethernet device (request source device)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Control

Module mounted on the smallest slot number

Same network number

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function

1

When multiple CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules with the same network number are connected to one system, the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module with the smallest slot number transfers the IP packet. To transfer the IP packet, connect the Ethernet device to a control CPU of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module with the same network number and smallest slot number.

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function 53

54

Example of communications using the IP packet transfer function The following system configuration is used to explain an example of communications.

Setting in the CPU module 1 and control station (station No.1) 1. Set the IP address of the CPU module 1 as follows.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] Target module [Module Parameter] [Basic Settings] [Own Node Settings] [IP Address]

2. Change the following setting to "Use" in the CPU module 1.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] Target module [Module Parameter] [Application Settings] [IP Packet Transfer Setting]

3. Set the IP address of the control station (station No.1) as follows.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Target module [Module Parameter] [Application Settings] [IP Address]

4. Write the set parameters to the CPU module 1. Then reset the CPU module 1 or power off and on the system.

192.168.1.1 192.168.10.1

Ethernet device (request source device)

: Route through which IP packets are passed

Network No.1 Network No.10

CPU module 1: 192.168.1.10 Control station (station No.1): 192.168.2.1

CPU module 2: 192.168.10.10 Normal station (station No.2): 192.168.2.2

Network No.2

Ethernet device (request destination device)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function

1

Setting in the CPU module 2 and normal station (station No.2) 1. Set the IP address of the CPU module 2 as follows.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] Target module [Module Parameter] [Basic Settings] [Own Node Settings] [IP Address]

2. Change the following setting to "Use" in the CPU module 2.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] Target module [Module Parameter] [Application Settings] [IP Packet Transfer Setting]

3. The normal station (station No.2) does not require an IP address. The network address set in the control station (station No.1) is automatically assigned.

4. Write the set parameters to the CPU module 2. Then reset the CPU module 2 or power off and on the system.

Checking the status of communications After the setting is completed in each module, execute the IP communication test to check for an error in the communication path on CC-Link IE Controller Network. ( Page 49 IP communication test)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function 55

56

Communication speed This section provides the results of communication speed measured using the IP packet transfer function. Use the results as a reference.

When request source and destination devices are connected to a CPU module The results are based on measurement when FTP communications are performed with four RJ71GP21-SXs or RJ71EN71s connected.

System configuration When optical fiber cables are used

When Ethernet cables are used

Device Description Ethernet device (request source device)

CPU Intel Core 2 Duo processor 2.00GHz

OS Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System

Ethernet board 1000BASE-T

FTP client application FFFTP

Ethernet device (request destination device)

CPU Intel Core i5 Duo processor 2.67GHz

OS Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Operating System

Ethernet board 1000BASE-T

FTP server application FileZilla Server

Programmable controller CPU module R04CPU Sequence scan time: 1ms

CC-Link IE Controller Network Cyclic transmission: 128 points assigned to each station for the LB and LW, 256 points assigned to each station for the LX and LY

Transient transmission: N/A

EthernetEthernet

Ethernet device (request destination device)

Ethernet device (request source device)

EthernetEthernet

(1) (2) (1) (2)

Ethernet device (request destination device)

Ethernet device (request source device)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function

1

Measurement result of the communication speed The following table lists the time that takes until a file is read from a request source device to a request destination device.

When request source and destination devices are connected to RJ71EN71 The results are based on measurement when FTP communications are performed with four RJ71GP21-SXs or RJ71EN71s connected.

System configuration When optical fiber cables are used ("Port 1 Network Type" and "Port 2 Network Type" are set to "Ethernet" for the

RJ71EN71.)

When Ethernet cables are used ("Port 1 Network Type" is set to "Ethernet" and "Port 2 Network Type" is set to "CC-Link IE Control" for the RJ71EN71.)

Measurement result of the communication speed The following table lists the time that takes until a file is read from a request source device to a request destination device.

Size of a file to be communicated Time (same as those when optical fiber cables are used and Ethernet cables are used) 1K bytes 10ms

50K bytes 300ms

100K bytes 600ms

1M bytes 4000ms

Device Description Ethernet device (request source device) Same as those when a request source device and a request destination

device are connected to a CPU module ( Page 56 When request source and destination devices are connected to a CPU module)

Ethernet device (request destination device)

Programmable controller

Size of a file to be communicated Time (same as those when optical fiber cables are used and Ethernet cables are used)

1K bytes 10ms

50K bytes 100ms

100K bytes 200ms

1M bytes 2000ms

EthernetEthernet

Ethernet device (request destination device)

Ethernet device (request source device)

EthernetEthernet

Ethernet device (request destination device)

Ethernet device (request source device)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function 57

58

To increase communication speed Communication speed can be increased by checking the following items again.

Sequence scan of a CPU module Shortening sequence scan time can increase communication speed. For causes extending sequence scan time, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

Transient transmission frequency Communications using the IP packet transfer function are performed with transient transmission. Taking one of the following actions can increase communication speed. Executing the COM instruction on a program and executing a service processing at any timing other than an END

processing increase the frequency of transient transmission (the amount of processing per transient transmission). Consequently, the frequency of communications using the IP packet transfer function increases, resulting in increased communication speed. ( MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Module Dedicated Instructions))

Decreasing the number of other transient transmission ensures the processing time of the IP packet transfer function; therefore, communication speed can be increased.

Link scan time Minimizing the number of link device points used in the cyclic transmission shortens link scan time, resulting in increased communication speed.

1 FUNCTIONS 1.3 IP Packet Transfer Function

1

1.4 Interrupt Request to CPU Module This function makes an interrupt request to the CPU module to start the interrupt program if the interrupt conditions preset using the engineering tool are met. Interrupt conditions are based on the changes in the link devices (LB, LW, LX) and the network statuses (SB, SW) checked every link scan or the data reception status of the channel specified via the RECVS instruction.

Setting method Set the interrupt request to the CPU module in "Interrupt Settings" under "Application Settings". ( Page 91 Interrupt Settings)

I50

FEND

END

IRET

Main routine program

Interrupt program

CPU module CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Conditions met

Interrupt condition check

Link device (LB, LW, LX) change

Network status (SB, SW) change

Data reception status of specified channel

Channel 2 Channel 1

RECVS instruction

Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8

1 FUNCTIONS 1.4 Interrupt Request to CPU Module 59

60

1.5 Loopback Function When optical fiber cables are used This function continues data link with normal stations even if a cable disconnection or faulty station occurs.

Cable disconnection Even if a cable disconnection occurs, the system automatically performs loopback to continue the data link.

Occurrence of faulty stations The system disconnects faulty stations and automatically performs loopback to continue the data link. If two or more faulty stations occur, a station located between the faulty stations cannot perform data link. However, when more than one station exists between the faulty stations, a normal station is changed to a sub-control station and continues data link.

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.6)

Normal station (station No.5)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Disconnection

Control station (station No.1) Loopback station

Normal station (station No.6) Loopback station

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.5)

Sub-control station (station No.3) Loopback station

Normal station (station No.4) Loopback station

Down

Down

1 FUNCTIONS 1.5 Loopback Function

1

Setting method The loopback function remains effective at all times. No parameter setting is required.

Precautions When the RJ71GP21(S)-SX fails, loopback may not be performed depending on what kind of failure occurs. In such a case, data link may be stopped. To identify the RJ71GP21(S)-SX with a failure, perform either of the following. Identify a faulty station by checking the LED indications (off of RUN LED, on or flashing of ERR LED) of all RJ71GP21(S)-

SXs. Turn off the power of all stations, then turn on the power of stations in order, starting from the control station. While doing

this, check up to which station on the network loopback is normally performed. Check whether the control station and a reconnected normal station are displayed on a loopback station in the network information display of the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

Replace the RJ71GP21(S)-SX where a failure was detected with a new one and check that data link has returned to normal status.

1 FUNCTIONS 1.5 Loopback Function 61

62

When Ethernet cables are used This function continues data link with normal stations even if a cable disconnection or faulty station occurs. All stations after the cable disconnection point or faulty station are disconnected in a line topology. By using this function with ring topology, data link continues with normal stations.

The RJ71EN71 and RnENCPU can be used only when "Port 1 Network Type" is set to "CC-Link IE Control".

Cable disconnection

Even if a cable disconnection occurs, the system automatically performs loopback to continue the data link.

Stations connected after the cable disconnection point are disconnected.

Occurrence of faulty stations

The system disconnects faulty stations and automatically performs loopback to continue the data link.

Stations connected after the faulty station are disconnected.

Ring topology

Disconnected

Line topology

Disconnected

Ring topology

Fault

Line topology

Fault

1 FUNCTIONS 1.5 Loopback Function

1

Setting method 1. Configure the network in ring topology.

2. Set "Network Topology" to "Ring" in "Basic Settings" of the control station.

Precautions Loopback function setting and network configuration To use the loopback function, configure the network in ring topology and set "Network Topology" to "Ring" in "Basic Settings" of the control station. If "Network Topology" and the network configuration are inconsistent, an error may occur in all stations and data link cannot be performed.

1 FUNCTIONS 1.5 Loopback Function 63

64

1.6 External Power Supply Function This function directly supplies the power to the RJ71GP21S-SX from an external source. Even at power down of a CPU module, the network is not cut off at the station with the power failure, and thus data link continues on normal stations. Furthermore, if the power failure occurs on more than one station, data link continues on a station existing between faulty stations.

Without the external power supply function If the power failure of the CPU module occurs on the station No.3 and station No.5, loopback occurs on the station No.2 and station No.4, and data link stops on station No.6.

With the external power supply function Even though the power failure of the CPU module occurs on the station No.3 and station No.5, data link continues on the station No.6. Loopback does not occur on the station No.2 and station No.4.

Operating precautions If the external power supply of the RJ71GP21S-SX is turned on while the power of the CPU module is off, the RJ71GP21S- SX does not operate normally. Turn on both of the powers of CPU module and the RJ71GP21S-SX and start the operation.

(1) Control station (station No.1) (2) Normal station (station No.2): Loopback station (3) Normal station (station No.3) (4) Normal station (station No.4): Loopback station (5) Normal station (station No.5) (6) Normal station (station No.6)

(1) Control station (station No.1) (2) Normal station (station No.2) (3) Normal station (station No.3) (4) Normal station (station No.4) (5) Normal station (station No.5) (6) Normal station (station No.6)

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5) (6)Down

Down

No communication

(1) (2) (3)

(4) (5) (6)Down

Down

1 FUNCTIONS 1.6 External Power Supply Function

1

1.7 Redundant System Function The redundant system function improves system reliability by mounting CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules on the base units of both systems of a redundant system so that the new control system can continue data link even if an error occurs in the control system.

The following modules are required to use the redundant system function. Process CPU Redundant function module The RJ71GP21-SX or RJ71GP21S-SX with a firmware version of "12" or later When using a redundant system, check the versions of the Process CPU and the engineering tool. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

System configuration This section describes the system configuration of a redundant system using CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules. CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules are mounted on the base units of both systems of a redundant system. A redundant system is configured by connecting the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules in both systems together using optical fiber cables.

(1) Control station (station No.1) as the control system (system A) (2) Normal station (station No.2) as the standby system (system B) (3) Normal station (station No.3) (4) Normal station (station No.4)

(1) (2) (3) (4)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.7 Redundant System Function 65

66

System switching operation In a redundant system, if the control system fails, the control system and the standby system are switched. In CC-Link IE Controller Network, send data is transferred to the new control system after system switching to continue data link. The following shows system switching operation when a communication error occurs in the control system.

1. A communication error occurs in control system (1).

2. The CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module of control system (1) issues a system switching request to the CPU module.

3. System switching occurs in the redundant system.

4. Standby system (2) starts operating as the new control system to continue network control.

If system switching is performed by a cause not leading to a communication error, control station switching is not performed.

While the control is switched to a station of the new control system, the cyclic data output is held. For cyclic data holding time (output holding time) when system switching occurs, refer to the following.

Page 207 Cyclic data holding time when system switching occurs

Setting method When using the module in a redundant system, select "RJ71GP21-SX (R)" or "RJ71GP21S-SX (R)" for the module name in the "Add New Module" window. Note that pairing needs to be set for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules of both systems. Pairing is set under "Network Range Assignment" in "Required Settings" of the control station. ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment)

(1) (2)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.7 Redundant System Function

1

Cyclic transmission send/receive processing When pairing is set for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules of both systems, send data is transferred to the new control system at the time of system switching to continue cyclic transmission. The following is the send range of cyclic transmission when pairing is set. The own station send ranges of the link devices (LB, LW) of both systems become the same when pairing is set. The station operating as the control system sends and receives cyclic data. The station operating as the standby system only receives cyclic data. Each number in the figure, from No.1 to No.4, represents a station number.

Send range of station number (1) From station No.1 as the control system, data in the send ranges of stations No.1 and No.2 are sent to station 3 and station 4. If system switching occurs to

due to an error in station No.1, data in the send ranges of stations No.1 and No.2 are sent from station No.2, which starts operating as the new control system.

(2) Data in the send range of station No.3 is sent to all stations including station No.2 operating as the standby system. (3) Data in the send range of station No.4 is sent to all stations including station No.2 operating as the standby system.

LB0 (1)

(2)

(3)

LB7FFF

No.1, No.2

No.3

No.4

No.1, No.2

No.3

No.4

No.1, No.2

No.3

No.4

No.3

No.4

No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4

1 FUNCTIONS 1.7 Redundant System Function 67

68

Precautions Tracking Of all refresh target devices (B, W) of link devices (LB, LW), tracking needs to be set for the devices in the own station send

range. Tracking cannot be set for link direct devices. Do not set tracking for the link special relay areas (SB0020 to SB01FF), which are turned on/off by the system, or the link

special register areas (SW0020 to SW01FF), where data is stored by the system.

For details on tracking, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

Programming In CC-Link IE Controller Network, the network detects a temporary communication error based on the condition of power-on/ off, cables, noise, and others. Create a program using CC-Link IE Controller Network in such a way that control operation is not stopped even if such a temporary communication error is detected.

Detection of an error when another station is powered on/off When either of the following operations is performed, a temporary data link error may be detected and a system switching request may be issued. Another station (including the standby system) is powered on/off. A personal computer equipped with a CC-Link IE Controller Network interface board boots or shuts down. If the above system switching request is issued before the standby system starts up, the control system CPU module may detect a continuation error (system switching error). Even in this case, the control system continues to control the system normally. Create a program where control operation is not stopped due to error detection. Before clearing the continuation error (system switching error) detected by the control system CPU module, check that the standby system and the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules operate correctly with the special register. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

1 FUNCTIONS 1.7 Redundant System Function

1

System switching request to the control system CPU module When the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module mounted on the control system detects a data link error, it issues a system switching request to the control system CPU module. However, depending on the operating status of the standby system, system switching is not executed. For details on the operating status of the standby system and whether system switching is executable, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

System switching cause This section describes causes that make the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module issue a system switching request.

For details on causes other than a system switching request from the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

Moderate/major error and hardware failure When detecting an error where the module cannot continue the processing, the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module notifies the control system CPU module about the error and issues a system switching request.

Data link error If the data link error status (D LINK LED off) continues for the system switching monitoring time set in "Supplementary Cyclic Settings" under "Application Settings" or longer, the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module issues a system switching request to the control system CPU module.

When cyclic transmission is stopped using the link start/stop of the CC-Link IE Field Network diagnostics, a system switching request is not issued to the control system CPU module. (This also applies to cases in which cyclic transmission is stopped by the link special relay (SB) or link special register (SW).)

Disabling system switching When 'Flag for disabling system switching due to data link error' (SB0017) is turned on for both systems in advance, even if a data link error is detected, a system switching request is not issued to the control system CPU module.

The disabling of system switching is a function for maintenance. Use this function to prevent system switching from occurring due to a data link error caused by faulty operation during network maintenance.

To disable system switching, set tracking to 'Flag for disabling system switching due to data link error' (SB0017) so that 'Flag for disabling system switching due to data link error' (SB0017) is turned on for both systems.

If a system switching request is issued due to a cause other than a data link error, system switching is executed regardless of the status of 'Flag for disabling system switching due to data link error' (SB0017).

1 FUNCTIONS 1.7 Redundant System Function 69

70

Functions restricted in a redundant system The following table lists the functions restricted when using CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules in a redundant system.

Function Restrictions Transient transmission To perform the transient transmission specifying the control system or standby system, acquire the

current target station address (address of the control system or standby system) by using the module FB (RedundantSystem_GetAddress) and access the acquired address. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet, CC-Link IE, and MELSECNET/H Function Block Reference)

Precautions exist for communications with different networks when the networks contain a redundant system. ( Page 42 When the networks contain a redundant system)

Precautions exist for when the dedicated instructions are used to a redundant system. ( Page 201 Precautions for dedicated instructions)

IP packet transfer function IP address setting of the Ethernet-equipped module Use the IP address of the control system to maintain communications when system switching occurs. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)) Communications at the time of system switching When system switching occurs in a redundant system on a communication path, communications may be interrupted or data may be lost. Also, communications may be disabled during system switching. If an error occurs in communications, resend data from the request source. When the Ethernet-equipped module connecting to an Ethernet device is redundant When using the dynamic routing, execute this function via the control system. An error occurs if

transfer operation is executed via the standby system. Set "Routing Setting" of "CPU Parameter" when executing this function via the standby system.

Set "Routing Setting" of "CPU Parameter" when executing this function even when stop errors exist in the CPU modules of both systems.

1 FUNCTIONS 1.7 Redundant System Function

1

Setting example This section describes the setting details for communications in a redundant system.

System configuration example

Setting in the control station Connect the engineering tool to the CPU module to be set as the control system and set the parameters. In a redundant system, the same program and parameter are written to both systems. A new project does not need to be created for the standby system.

1. Set the CPU module as follows.

[Project] [New]

2. Click the [Setting Change] button and set to use module labels.

3. Click the [OK] button to add the module labels of the CPU module.

1 FUNCTIONS 1.7 Redundant System Function 71

72

4. In the I/O assignment setting, set the redundant function module for slot No.0.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [System Parameter] [I/O Assignment] tab [I/O Assignment Setting]

5. Set the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module for slot No.1.

6. Click the [Setting Change] button and set to use module labels.

7. Click the [OK] button to add the module labels of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

1 FUNCTIONS 1.7 Redundant System Function

1

8. Set the network range assignment as follows.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] [RJ71GP21-SX(R)] [Module Parameter] [Required Settings] [Network Range Assignment]

9. Set the refresh settings as follows.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] [RJ71GP21-SX(R)] [Module Parameter] [Basic Settings] [Refresh Setting]

10. Set the redundant function module of the own system as the system A in the "System A/B Setting" window, and reset the CPU modules of both systems or power off and on the both systems.

[Online] [Redundant PLC Operation] [System A/B Setting]

11. Write the set parameters to the system A CPU module.

[Online] [Write to PLC]

12.Click the [Yes] button to write to the CPU modules of both systems.

13. Either reset the CPU modules of both systems or power off and on both systems.

In this setting example, default settings are used for the parameters other than those described. For the parameter setting, refer to the chapter explaining the parameters in this manual. ( Page 74 PARAMETER SETTINGS)

1 FUNCTIONS 1.7 Redundant System Function 73

74

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS This chapter describes the parameter settings required for communications between the CC-Link IE Controller Network- equipped module and other stations.

2.1 Setting Parameters 1. Add the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module in the engineering tool.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Right click [Add New Module]

2. The required settings, basic settings, and application settings are included in the parameter settings. Select one of the settings from the tree on the window shown below and set parameters.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Target module [Module Parameter]

3. After setting parameters, click the [Apply] button.

4. Write the settings to the CPU module using the engineering tool.

[Online] [Write to PLC]

5. The settings are reflected by resetting the CPU module or powering off and on the system.

2.2 Required Settings Set the station type, network number, or other parameters for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

: Can be set, : Cannot be set

Item Description Availability Reference

Control station

Normal station

Station Type Set the station type of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. Page 75 Station Type

Network Number Set the network number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. Page 75 Network Number

Station Number Set the station number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. Page 75 Station Number

Network Range Assignment

Set parameters of each stations (the number of points and assignment of link devices) in the control station.

Page 76 Network Range Assignment

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.1 Setting Parameters

2

Station Type Set the station type of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

Network Number Set the network number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

Station Number Set the station number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

*1 The setting range is 1 to 119 when "RJ71GP21-SX(R)" or "RJ71GP21S-SX(R)" is selected for "Module Name".

Item Description Setting range Station Type Select whether to use the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module as the control station or a

normal station. One control station can be set in a network. Send points can be extended by selecting "Ext. Mode Control Station" or "Ext. Mode Normal Station". ( Page 37 Number of send points extension by using multiple modules)

Control Station Normal Station Ext. Mode Control

Station Ext. Mode Normal

Station (Default: Station type set in the "Add New Module" window.)

Item Description Setting range Network number Set the network number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. 1 to 239

(Default: 1)

Item Description Setting range Setting Method Select whether to set the station number in parameter editor or in program (UINI instruction). This item

can be set only for a normal station. When selecting "Program", use the UINI instruction to set the number. ( MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Module Dedicated Instructions)) This item cannot be set when "RJ71GP21-SX(R)" or "RJ71GP21S-SX(R)" is selected for "Module Name". Set the number using a parameter.

Parameter Editor Program

(Default: Parameter Editor)

Station No. Set the station number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. Station number can be set within the range set in "Total No. of Stations" in the "Network Range

Assignment" window in "Required Settings" of the control station. To set the larger value, change the value in "Total No. of Stations" in the "Network Range Assignment" window beforehand.

Set a station number different from those used in the same network. To set the station number of a normal station in this setting, set "Setting Method" to "Parameter Editor".

1 to 120*1

(Default: 1 for control station, 2 for normal station)

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.2 Required Settings 75

76

Network Range Assignment Set parameters of normal stations (the number of points and assignment of link devices) in the control station.

Network range assignments are set in the control station only. Normal stations perform cyclic transmission according to the range assigned at the control station.

When "LB/LW Setting (2)" is used, link scan time will be longer compared to using "LB/LW Setting (1)" only.

Setting procedure The procedure for the network range assignment settings is shown below.

1. Set the required items.

2. Click the [Apply] button to finish the network range assignment.

Setting items Item Description Setting range Total No. Stations When setting "Station Type" to "Control Station" or "Ext. Mode Control Station", set the total number

of stations in a network. When any reserved station is required, include the number of reserved stations. When skipping a station number, specify the number to be skipped as a reserved station.

2 to 120 (Default: 2)

Switch Windows Select the "LB/LW Setting" window or "LX/LY Setting" window. LB/LW Setting (1) LB/LW Setting (2) LX/LY Setting (1) LX/LY Setting (2)

(Default: LB/LW Setting (1))

Device Assignment Method

Right-click in the setting window and select a link device assignment method from the "Device Assignment Method" menu. Start/End: Enter the start and end numbers of link devices. Points/Start: Enter the start and end numbers of link devices.

Start/End Points/Start

(Default: Start/End)

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.2 Required Settings

2

Batch Setting

Equal Assignment

Specify the start station and end station, and equally assign link devices to stations.

Start Station: Enter the start station number of stations for which link devices are equally assigned.

End Station: Enter the end station number of stations for which link devices are equally assigned. Start Device No.: Enter the start number of link devices to be equally assigned. Number of Points: Enter the total points of link devices to be equally assigned.

Start Station: (Default: Blank) 1 to the end station number End Station: (Default: Blank) Number set to "Start

Station" to the end station number

Start Device No.: (Default: Blank) Same as "LB/LW Setting

(1)", "LB/LW Setting (2)", "LX/LY Setting (1)", or "LX/ LY Setting (2)".

Number of Points LB (Default: Blank) 16 to 32768 (Link points

extended setting: Not to Extend)

16 to 65536 (Link points extended setting: Extend)

LW (Default: Blank) 1 to 131072 (Link points

extended setting: Not to Extend)

1 to 262144 (Link points extended setting: Extend)

Identical Point Assignment

Assign the same points to each station's send range in LB/LW. (Default: Blank)

Item Description Setting range

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.2 Required Settings 77

78

LB/LW Setting (1) LB/LW Setting (2)

Assign LB/LW points. ( Page 19 Communications using LB and LW) Normally, setting only "LB/LW Setting (1)" is enough for communications using LB/LW. Set "LB/LW Setting (2)" in the following cases: When extending each station's send range without changing existing assignments (When

changing the LB/LW assignment, correct link refresh range of each station. ( Page 84 Refresh Setting))

When intentionally dividing each station's send range into two (e.g. within and outside the link refresh range)

When settings are configured with the following four conditions met, 32-bit data integrity is automatically assured. ( Page 27 Cyclic data integrity assurance) The start device number of LB is a multiple of 20H. The number of points assigned per station in LB is a multiple of 20H. The start device number of LW is a multiple of 2. The number of points assigned per station in LW is a multiple of 2.

(Default: Blank)

LB Points Set the number of points (decimal) of LB sent by each station. (The sum of "LB/LW Setting (1)" and "LB/LW Setting (2)") Setting range can be assigned in increments of 16 points.

16 to 16384 (Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

16 to 16384 (Link points extended setting: Extend)

When "Station Type" in "Required Settings" is set to "Ext. Mode Control Station" or "Ext. Mode Normal Station" Setting range can be assigned in increments of 16 points.

16 to 32768 (Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

16 to 65536 (Link points extended setting: Extend)

Start Set the start number of the LB range to be sent by each station. Setting range can be assigned in multiples of 16.

0000H to 7FF0H (Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

0000H to FFF0H (Link points extended setting: Extend)

End Set the end number of the LB range to be sent by each station. Setting range can be assigned in multiples of 16 -1.

000FH to 7FFFH (Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

000FH to FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Extend)

LW Points Set the number of points (decimal) of LW sent by each station. (The sum of "LB/LW Setting (1)" and "LB/LW Setting (2)") Setting range can be assigned in increments of 1 point.

1 to 16384 (Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

1 to 16384 (Link points extended setting: Extend)

When "Station Type" in "Required Settings" is set to "Ext. Mode Control Station" or "Ext. Mode Normal Station" Setting range can be assigned in increments of 1 point.

1 to 131072 (Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

1 to 262144 (Link points extended setting: Extend)

Start Set the start number of the LW range to be sent by each station. 0000H to 1FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

0000H to 3FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Extend)

End Set the end number of the LW range to be sent by each station. 0000H to 1FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

0000H to 3FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Extend)

Item Description Setting range

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.2 Required Settings

2

LX/LY Setting (1) LX/LY Setting (2)

Assign LX/LY points. ( Page 20 Communications using LX and LY) Set "LX/LY Setting (1)" for block 1, and "LX/LY Setting (2)" for block 2. Avoid duplication of the LX/LY settings for each station in "LX/LY Setting (1)" and "LX/LY Setting (2)". The LX/LY data of the same I/O numbers with the actual I/O (the range where actual modules are mounted) must be refreshed to the area after the actual I/O area or to any other than X/Y in refresh settings. Refresh target CPU-side devices in refresh settings cannot overlap with the actual I/O areas. ( Page 84 Refresh Setting)

(Default: Blank)

M Station L Station

LY Points Set the number of points (decimal) of the output range (LY) sent from the M station (I/O master station) to the other station.

16 to 8192 (set in increments of 16 points)

Start Set the start number of the output range (LY) of the M station (I/O master station).

0000H to 1FF0H (multiples of 16)

End Set the end number of the output range (LY) of the M station (I/O master station).

000FH to 1FFFH (multiples of 16 - 1)

LX Points The number of points (decimal) of the input range (LX) received by the L station (the station other than the I/O master station) from the M station is displayed.

Start Set the start number of the input range (LX) of the L station (the station other than the I/O master station).

0000H to 1FF0H (multiples of 16)

End The end number of the input range (LX) of the L station (the station other than the I/O master station) is displayed.

M Station L Station

LX Points Set the number of points (decimal) of the input range (LX) received by the M station (I/O master station) from the other station.

16 to 8192 (set in increments of 16 points)

Start Set the start number of the input range (LX) of the M station (I/O master station).

0000H to 1FF0H (multiples of 16)

End Set the end number of the input range (LX) of the M station (I/O master station).

000FH to 1FFFH (multiples of 16 - 1)

LY Points The number of points (decimal) of the output range (LY) sent from the L station (the station other than the I/O master station) to the I/O master station is displayed.

Start Set the start number of the output range (LY) of the L station (the station other than the I/O master station).

0000H to 1FF0H (multiples of 16)

End The end number of the output range (LY) of the L station (the station other than the I/O master station) is displayed.

I/O Master Station Set an I/O master station for each block to perform communication using LX/LY. Up to two I/O master stations can be set for one network (block 1 and block 2), regardless of the status of control or normal station.

No Setting I/O Master Station

(Default: No Setting)

Reserved Station Set to specify the normal station as a reserved station. No Setting: The normal station is connected to the network. Reserved Station: The normal station is reserved for future expansion. By reserving a normal

station, link device assignment will not change even if the normal station is added or the reservation is cancelled. Therefore, the program needs not to be modified. Physical connection of the normal station is not required.

No Setting Reserved Station

(Default: No Setting)

Pairing When the network contains a redundant system, set a combination of stations of system A and system B. When Ethernet cables are used, it cannot be set to "Enable".

Enable Disable

(Default: Disable)

Shared Group Set the stations sharing cyclic data for the same shared group number. ( Page 81 Shared Group)

1 to 120 (Default: Blank)

Item Description Setting range

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.2 Required Settings 79

80

Pairing When the network contains a redundant system, set a combination of stations of system A and system B. ( Page 65 Redundant System Function)

Setting method To pair station No.1 with station No.2, set as follows:

By setting "Enable" in the "Paring" column for station No.1, the setting values in columns other than the "Reserved Station" column for station No.2 become the same as the setting values for station No.1.

Precautions Only stations with adjacent station numbers can be paired in the pairing setting. Pairing cannot be set in "LX/LY Setting (1)" or "LX/LY Setting (2)".

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.2 Required Settings

2

Shared Group Set the stations that share their cyclic data to the same shared group number with any of the following procedures. ( Page 34 Group cyclic transmission) Directly entering a shared group number: Set the shared group number in each station. Using the shared group setting: Set the station numbers which belong to each shared group number. This setting is common to "LB/LW Setting (1)", "LB/LW Setting (2)" and "LX/LY Setting (1)", and "LX/LY Setting (2)".

Directly entering a shared group number Directly enter a shared group number in the "Shared Group" area of "Network Range Assignment".

Shared Group Settings The following is a procedure for setting a shared group No.1 in the "Shared Group Settings" window.

1. Clicking "Shared Group" in "Network Range Assignment" displays the "Shared Group Settings" window.

2. Select "(New Shared Group)" in "Edit Shared Group".

3. In the "New Shared Group" window, enter "1" and click the [OK] button.

4. In the "Edit Shared Group (Shared Group 1)" window, add a station number displayed in the "Unregistered Station No." area to the "Registered Station No." area in order to set it in the shared group No.1. Click the [Setting End] button.

5. Click the [Setting End] button in the "Shared Group Settings" button.

6. "1" is set in "Shared Group" in "Network Range Assignment".

To set a new shared group, repeat the above steps 2. to 4.

7. To edit an existing shared group, select the shared group number in "Edit Shared Group" and click the [Edit] button to perform the operation of the step 4.

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.2 Required Settings 81

82

Precautions When setting the shared group number, set "Enable" in "Station-based Block Data Assurance" under "Supplementary Cyclic Settings" in "Application Settings". When "Station-based Block Data Assurance" is set to "Enable", cyclic data of the stations in different shared groups will not be refreshed to the link devices. ( Page 26 Cyclic data integrity assurance)

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.2 Required Settings

2

2.3 Basic Settings Set the link refresh settings and network topology setting for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

: Can be set, : Cannot be set

Item Description Availability Reference

Control station

Normal station

Refresh Setting Set the link refresh ranges between the link devices (LB, LW, LX, LY, SB, SW) of the CC- Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and the devices of the CPU module or between the link devices (SB, SW) of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and the module label of the CPU module.

Page 84 Refresh Setting

Network Topology Select the topology type according to the actual network configuration. Page 87 Network Topology

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.3 Basic Settings 83

84

Refresh Setting Set the link refresh ranges between the link devices (LB, LW, LX, LY, SB, SW) of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and the devices of the CPU module or between the link devices (SB, SW) of the CC-Link IE Controller Network- equipped module and the module label of the CPU module.

Setting procedure The procedure for the refresh settings is shown below.

1. Set the required items.

2. Click the [Apply] button to finish the refresh settings.

Setting items Item Description Setting range Device Assignment Method

Right-click in the setting window and select a link device assignment method from the "Device Assignment Method" menu. Start/End: Enter the start and end numbers of link devices. Points/Start: Enter the start and end numbers of link devices.

Start/End Points/Start

(Default: Start/End)

Link Side Set the link refresh ranges of SB and SW. One range can be set for each SB and SW. ( Page 21 Link refresh)

Device Name SB (fixed) SW (fixed)

Points SB (fixed): 16 to 512 SW (fixed): 1 to 512

(Default: 512) Start SB (fixed): 0H to 1F0H (set in increments of 16

points) SW (fixed): 0H to 1FFH (set in increments of 1 point)

(Default: 0H) End SB (fixed): FH to 1FFH (set in increments of 16

points) SW (fixed): 0H to 1FFH (set in increments of 1 point)

(Default: 1FFH)

CPU Side

Target Module Label Device

(Default: Module Label) Device Name Module Label: Device (when link side is SB): SB, M, L, B, D, R, ZR,

RD Device (when link side is SW): SW, M, L, B, D, R,

ZR, RD (Default: Blank) Points, Start, End Range of the device in a CPU module Set bit devices in increments of 16 points and word

devices in increments of 1 point. (Default: Blank)

0000H

01FFH

0000H

01FFH

0000H

01FFH

0000H

01FFH

Device name (SB)

Transfer SB

Transfer SW

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module CPU module

Device name (SW)

Device name (SB)

Device name (SW)

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.3 Basic Settings

2

The link devices of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module can be accessed from a program. ( Page 23 Direct access to link devices)

Precautions Device set to "CPU Side" Set a device range that differs from the one used for the following: "Refresh Setting" in "Basic Settings" of other network modules "Link Refresh Settings" in "Basic Settings" of a CC-Link master/local module I/O numbers used for I/O modules and intelligent function modules "Refresh Setting" of intelligent function modules "Refresh Setting between Multiple CPU" of "CPU Parameter" for a multiple CPU system

Link refresh range Set only link devices used in the CPU module for link refresh range. Doing so will reduce link refresh points, resulting in a shorter link refresh time.

1 to 256 Link Side Set the link refresh ranges of LB, LW, LX, and LY. Up to 256 ranges can be set. ( Page 21 Link refresh)

Device Name LB, LW, LX, LY

(Default: Blank) Points (Default: Blank) LB (set in increments of 16 points) 16 to 32768 (Link points extended setting: Not to

Extend) 16 to 65536 (Link points extended setting: Extend)

LW (set in increments of 1 point) 1 to 131072 (Link points extended setting: Not to

Extend) 1 to 262144 (Link points extended setting: Extend)

LX, LY (set in increments of 16 points) 16 to 8192 Start (Default: Blank) LB (set in multiples of 16) 0 to 7FF0H (Link points extended setting: Not to

Extend) 0 to FFF0H (Link points extended setting: Extend)

LW (set in increments of 1 point) 0 to 1FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Not to

Extend) 0 to 3FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Extend)

LX, LY (set in multiples of 16) 0H to 1FF0H End (Default: Blank) LB (set in multiples of 16-1) F to 7FFFH (Link points extended setting: Not to

Extend) F to FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Extend)

LW (set in increments of 1 point) 0 to 1FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Not to

Extend) 0 to 3FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Extend)

LX, LY (set in multiples of 16-1) FH to 1FFFH

CPU Side

Target Device

(Default: Blank) Device Name Device: X, Y, M, L, B, D, W, R, ZR, RD

(Default: Blank) Points, Start, End Range of the device in a CPU module Set bit devices in increments of 16 points and word

devices in increments of 1 point. (Default: Blank)

Item Description Setting range

0000H

00FFH

0000H

00FFH

0000H

00FFH

0000H

00FFH

1000H

10FFH

1000H

10FFH

000000H

0000FFH

001000H

0010FFH

Device name (LB)

Device name (LW)

Device name (LX)

Device name (LY)

Device name (Y)

Device name (X)

Device name (W)

Device name (B)

Transfer 1

Transfer 2

Transfer 3

Transfer 4

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module CPU module

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.3 Basic Settings 85

86

Changing link device assignment in the "Network Range Assignment" window of "Required Settings"

Correct the set range in "Refresh Setting" of "Basic Settings".

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.3 Basic Settings

2

Network Topology Select the topology type according to the actual network configuration.

Item Description Setting range Network Topology Select the topology type according to the actual network

configuration. ( Page 60 Loopback Function) Select "Ring" in the following cases: When the RJ71GP21(S)-SX is used When the loopback function of the RJ71EN71 or RnENCPU

is used

When the RJ71GP21(S)-SX is used Ring Line/Star (cannot be set)

(Default: Ring) When "Port 1 Network Type" is set to "CC-Link IE Control" for the RJ71EN71 or RnENCPU Ring Line/Star

(Default: Ring) When "Port 1 Network Type" is set to "Ethernet" and "Port 2 Network Type" is set to "CC-Link IE Control" for the RJ71EN71 or RnENCPU Line/Star Ring (cannot be set)

(Default: Line/Star)

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.3 Basic Settings 87

88

2.4 Application Settings Set the supplementary cyclic settings, interrupt settings, or other parameters for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

: Can be set, : Cannot be set

Item Description Availability Reference

Control station

Normal station

Supplementary Cyclic Settings

Set the data link monitoring time, system switching monitoring time, constant link scan time, station-based block data assurance, and transient transmission settings.

Page 90 Supplementary Cyclic Settings

Link points extended setting

Set whether to extend or not for the maximum number of link points per network in LB or LW.

Page 90 Link points extended setting

Interrupt Settings Set conditions for sending an interrupt request to the CPU module. Page 91 Interrupt Settings

Transient Transmission Group No.

Set the transient transmission group number. Page 95 Transient Transmission Group No.

Dynamic Routing Select whether to enable the dynamic routing function. Page 95 Dynamic Routing

IP Address Set the IP address of the control station to communicate with Ethernet device over CC-Link IE Controller Network.

Page 95 IP Address

Parameter Name Set a name for the module parameter if desired. Page 95 Parameter Name

Event Reception from Other Stations

Select whether to obtain the events occurring in the other stations. Page 95 Event Reception from Other Stations

Module Operation Mode

Set the operation mode of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. Page 96 Module Operation Mode

Interlink Transmission Settings

Set link device ranges when cyclic data are transferred from a station in the own network to a station in another network.

Page 97 Interlink Transmission Settings

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings

2

Redundant System Settings

Set the operation mode for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module mounted on system B in a redundant system. This item can be set only when "RJ71GP21-SX(R)" or "RJ71GP21S-SX(R)" is selected for "Module Name".

Page 101 Redundant System Settings

Item Description Availability Reference

Control station

Normal station

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings 89

90

Supplementary Cyclic Settings Set the data link monitoring time, constant link scan time, station-based block data assurance, and transient transmission settings.

Link points extended setting Set the link points extended setting

Item Description Setting range Data Link Monitoring Time

Set the time for monitoring the link scan time in units of 5ms. Normally, it is recommended to use the default value. If the link scan time exceeds the value set in "Data Link Monitoring Time", data linking is disabled.

5ms to 2000ms (Default: 2000ms)

System Switching Monitoring Time

When the network contains a redundant system, set the time (in increments of 10ms) from data link stop ('Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is turned on) to issuance of a system switching request. This item can be set only for the control station.

10 to 5000ms (Default: 2000ms)

Constant Link Scan Time

Set the constant link scan time. ( Page 33 Cyclic transmission punctuality assurance) 1ms to 500ms (Default: Blank)

Station-based Block Data Assurance

Set whether to ensure a data integrity of the data blocks being refreshed between the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and the CPU module. ( Page 27 Cyclic data integrity assurance)

Enable Disable

(Default: Enable)

Transient Transmission Settings

Punctuality Assurance: Set whether to assure the punctuality of cyclic transmissions. When the "Enable" is selected, each station performs transient transmissions for the number of times specified in "Maximum No. of Transient Transmissions", which keeps the link scan time constant. ( Page 33 Specification of the number of transient transmissions)

Enable Disable

(Default: Enable)

Maximum No. of Transient Transmissions: Set the number of transient transmissions that one station can perform in one link scan.

1 to 10 times (Default: 2 times)

Item Description Setting range Link points extended setting

Set whether to extend or not for the maximum number of link points per network in LB or LW. For the specifications of the maximum number of link points, refer to the following. Page 35 Number of send points extension

Not to Extend Extend

(Default: Not to Extend)

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings

2

Interrupt Settings Set conditions for sending an interrupt request to the CPU module.

Setting procedure The procedure for the interrupt settings is shown below.

1. Set the interrupt conditions. Up to 16 interrupt conditions can be set.

2. Click the [Apply] button to finish the interrupt settings.

Setting items

(Setting range)

*1 An interrupt occurs when the channel specified in "Device No./Channel No." receives data.

Item Description Setting range Word Device Setting Value Input Format

Right click in the setting window and select a format from the "Word Device Setting Value Input Format" menu.

Decimal Hexadecimal

(Default: Decimal)

Device/Reception Channel Set an interrupt condition device. Set the channel number when "Reception Channel" is selected in "Device/Reception Channel".

Refer to the following table.Device No./Channel No.

Detection Method Select the detection timing of an interrupt generated by the device set in "Device/Reception Channel" and "Device No./Channel No.".Condition Type

Condition Value When "LW" or "SW" is selected in "Device/Reception Channel", enter a word device value that triggers an interrupt.

Interrupt Pointer Set an interrupt pointer (I) to be used for an interrupt program.

Comment Set a comment for the interrupt pointer used.

Device/Reception Channel

Device No. /Channel No.

Detection Method Condition Type Condition Value

Interrupt Pointer

LB 0 to 7FFFH (Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

0 to FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Extend)

Level + ON: Interrupt occurs by turning on the device. Level + OFF: Interrupt occurs by turning off the device. Edge + ON: Interrupt occurs at the rising edge of the device. Edge + OFF: Interrupt occurs at the falling edge of the device.

Device: I0 to I15, I50 to I1023

LX 0H to 1FFFH

SB 0H to 1FFH

LW 0 to 1FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

0 to 3FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Extend)

Level + Values Match: Interrupt occurs when values match. Level + Values Mismatch: Interrupt occurs when values do not match. Edge + Values Match: Interrupt occurs when values match (first time only). Edge + Values Mismatch: Interrupt occurs when values do not match (first time only).

0 to 65535 (0H to FFFFH)

SW 0H to 1FFH

Reception Channel 1 to 8 Edge (fixed) Reception Completed (fixed)*1

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings 91

92

Using an interrupt program will eliminate the need for describing a start condition in a program. This leads to reduction in the number of steps and sequence scan time.

Precautions When "Detection Method" is set to "Level" and the interrupt condition is always met If the sequence scan takes much longer than the link scan, since interrupt processing is activated in each link scan, sequence scan time may greatly increase, resulting in a watchdog timer error of the CPU module. When "Detection Method" is set to "Level" and the interrupt condition is always met, do not use interrupt settings and correct the interrupt condition in the program.

Before executing an interrupt program Execute the EI instruction in a main routine program and enable an interrupt. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

When multiple interrupts have simultaneously occurred The operation may delay.

When the mode of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module is "Module Communication Test" or "Offline"

The CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module can send an interrupt request to the CPU module when the mode is "Offline". The module cannot send the request when the mode is "Module Communication Test" or "Offline".

Starting an interrupt program by the rising/falling edge of the specified device Do not use the rising/falling edge of a specified device (such as the PLS and PLF instructions) as a trigger of an interrupt program because a change in the device may fail to be read.

Ex.

Sending an interrupt request by turning on LB100 in a station in network No.7

An interrupt cannot be generated Changes in the interrupt condition device cannot be detected if the change is shorter than the transmission delay time.

Using cyclic data in an interrupt program When an interrupt program is executed, the link device data is not link-refreshed to CPU module devices. Directly access the link devices of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module by direct access.

PLS B100 Since change of LB100 may not be read, this cannot be specified as interrupt condition.

J7\

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings

2

Setting examples Starting the interrupt program when the status of a link device changes

Ex.

The following is a setting example to execute the interrupt program corresponding to the interrupt pointer I50 of the control station (station No.15) when LB100 turns on in the normal station (station No.3).

1. Set the interrupt setting parameters for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module control station (station No.15) as follows.

By using link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) as an interrupt condition device, an interrupt program can be started in case of data link error. ( Page 166 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas, Page 179 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas).

Starting the interrupt program when the channel specified in the RECVS instruction receives data sent from another station using the SEND instruction

Ex.

The following is a setting example to execute the interrupt program corresponding to the interrupt pointer I52 when the channel specified in the RECVS instruction (channel 5 of the control station (station No.15)) receives data sent from the normal station (station No.3) using the SEND instruction.

LB100

LB

LB100

I50 SM400

IRET

LB

Network No.7

Interrupt program execution

Receive processing

J7\B100

Control station (station No.15)

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Normal station (station No.3)

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

CPU module CPU module

I52 SM400

IRET

RECVS

SEND

Control station (station No.15)

Network No.7

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Normal station (station No.3)

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

CPU module CPU module

Interrupt program executionChannel 2

Channel 1

Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8

Channel 2 Channel 1

Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings 93

94

1. Set the interrupt setting parameters for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module control station (station No.15) as follows.

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings

2

Transient Transmission Group No. Set the transient transmission group number.

Dynamic Routing Select whether to enable the dynamic routing function.

For details, refer to the following. Page 41 Communications with different networks

IP Address Set the IP address of the control station to communicate with Ethernet device over CC-Link IE Controller Network. ( Page 46 Setting)

Parameter Name Set a name for the module parameter if desired.

Event Reception from Other Stations Select whether to obtain the events occurring in the other stations.

Item Description Setting range Transient Transmission Group No.

Set a group number for transient transmission with group specification. 0 to 32 (0: No group specification) (Default: 0)

Item Description Setting range Dynamic Routing When communicating with different networks, select whether to enable the dynamic routing function. Enable

Disable (Default: Enable)

Item Description Setting range IP Address Only the network address part (first and second octets) of the IP address needs to be set. The network

number part (third octet) and the station number part (fourth octet) are automatically set. Set an IP address for the control station only. Use the same network address for the request source device, request destination device, and modules

among them. Since automatically assigned, an IP address needs not to be set for normal stations. (The network

address same as that of the control station is automatically set.)

First octet: 0 to 223 Second octet: 0 to 255

Item Description Setting range Parameter Name Set a name for the module parameter if desired. Up to 8 one-byte or two-

byte characters (Default: Blank)

Item Description Setting range Event Reception from Other Stations

Select whether to obtain the events occurring in the other stations. Enable Disable

(Default: Enable)

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings 95

96

Module Operation Mode Select the operation mode of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. For the RJ71EN71 and RnENCPU, when the "Port 1 Network Type" is set to "Ethernet" and "Port 2 Network Type" is set to "CC-Link IE Control", set both of the P1 and P2 to the same mode. For a redundant system, select the module operation mode of system A. For details on module communication test mode, refer to the following. Page 108 Module communication test

The following functions are disabled when "Module Operation Mode" is set to "Offline" or "Module Communication Test". Cyclic transmission Transient transmission RAS (automatic return, loopback function, control station switching) Interrupt request to CPU module IP packet transfer function

Item Description Setting range Module Operation Mode

Online Select this mode to connect the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module to the network for

performing data link with other stations. Offline Select this mode to disconnect the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module from the network for

stopping data link with other stations. Module Communication Test Select this mode to check the hardware of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. Select

this mode to check the module hardware when communication is unstable.

Online Offline Module

Communication Test (Default: Online)

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings

2

Interlink Transmission Settings Set link device ranges when cyclic data are transferred from a station in the own network to a station in another network.

Setting procedure The procedure for the interlink transmission settings is shown below.

1. Select combination of modules in the "Transfer Source Module" and "Transfer Destination Module" boxes and enter setting values.

2. Click the [OK] button to finish the interlink transmission settings.

Item Description Setting range Setting Method Right-click in the "Interlink Transmission Parameters" window and select a link device setting method

from the "Setting Method" menu. Start/End: Enter the start and end numbers of link devices. Points/Start: Enter the start and end numbers of link devices.

Start/End Points/Start

(Default: Start/End)

Transfer Source Module Select the transfer source and target modules. The setting varies depending on the set module.

Transfer Destination Module

LB/RY RX/LB

Source Enter the link device range of the transfer source and destination modules. Up to 64 ranges can be set. LB points can be assigned in increments of 16 (Start: 0H, End: FH).

LB (Default: Blank) Points: 16 to 16384 Range: 0H to 7FFFH

(Link points extended setting: Not to Extend)

Range: 0H to FFFFH (Link points extended setting: Extend)

Destination

LB No.1

No.2

RY

RYLB

RX LB

LBRX

No.64

No.1

No.2

No.64 RYLB LBRX

When the transfer source is a CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

When the transfer target is a CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Start

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Network module

Network module

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

End Start

End

Start

End Start

End

Start

End Start

End

Start

End Start

End

Start

End

Start

End

Start

End

Start

End

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings 97

98

Link devices set for "Source" can be overlapped. Doing so will allow transfer of the same link devices to multiple network modules.

Precautions Modules supporting interlink transmission RJ71GN11-T2 (master station) CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module (control station, normal station) CC-Link IE Field Network-equipped module (master station and submaster station) RJ71LP21-25 (control station, normal station)

Transfer destination link device setting Do not use link devices set for link refresh range as a transfer target. If doing so, transfer target link devices will be overwritten by link refresh. To use transfer target link device data in the CPU module, set the transfer source link device as the link refresh range.

LW/RWw RWr/LW

Source Enter the link device range of the transfer source and destination modules. Up to 64 ranges can be set. LW points can be assigned in increments of 1.

LW (Default: Blank) Points: 1 to 16384 Range: 0H to 1FFFFH Range: 0H to 3FFFFH

(Link points extended setting: Extend)

Destination

Item Description Setting range

RWr LW

LWRWr

LW RWw

RWwLW

LWRWrRWwLW

No.1

No.2

No.64

No.1

No.2

No.64

When the transfer source is a CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

When the transfer target is a CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Start

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Network module

Network module

End Start

End

Start

End Start

End

Start

End Start

End

Start

End Start

End

Start

End

Start

End

Start

End

Start

End

Transfer source

Link refresh range 1

Link refresh range 2

CPU module Network module 1

Network module 2

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings

2

Setting 65 or more interlink transmission ranges Use link direct devices in a program to perform interlink transmission.

Performing interlink transmission in a multiple CPU system When different control CPUs are set for the network modules, interlink transmission cannot be performed using interlink transmission parameters or a program. Perform interlink transmission using data communication by the CPU buffer memory. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

RX200

RXX LB

RX27F

X1200

X127F LB780

LB7FF

Master station (station No.0)

Copied with MOV instruction.

Network No.1 Network No.2

CPU module Normal station (station No.4)

Station No.1 send range Station No.2 send range Station No.3 send range

Station No.4 send range

Link refresh

Link direct device cannot be specified for both the first and second arguments. Specify CPU device by link refresh for either one.

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings 99

10

Setting example The following is a setting example to perform interlink transmission from the master station on CC-Link IE Field Network to stations on CC-Link IE Controller Network. In this example, 128-point data input from the slave station (station No.1) on CC- Link IE Field Network is transferred.

1. Select "0000: RJ71GF11-T2 (Master Station)" for "Transfer Source Module" and "0020: RJ71GP21-SX (Normal Station)" for "Transfer Destination Module", and enter the transfer ranges of link devices.

2. Click the [OK] button.

If the transfer target network module is on a network other than CC-Link IE Controller Network, set the transfer target link devices within the own station send range of the network module. If the link devices are set within the send range of another station, the transferred data are overwritten with the send data of another station.

RX200

RX LB

RX27F LB780

LB7FF

128 points

Slave station (station No.1)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

CC-Link IE Field Network

Master station (station No.0)

Normal station (station No.4)

Station No.1 send range Station No.2 send range Station No.3 send range

Station No.4 send range

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Input

1000

0 RXLB

0

1000 to 103F

0 to 3F

Set this within its own station send range of the network module.

Own station send range

Other station send range

Control station (station No.1) Network module

0 2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings

2

Redundant System Settings Set the operation mode for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module mounted on system B in a redundant system.

Item Description Setting range Station Number (System A)

Displays the station number set in "Station Number" under "Required Settings".

Module Operation Mode (System A)

Displays the module operation mode set for "Module Operation Mode" under "Application Settings".

Station Number (System B)

Displays the station number of system B.

Module Operation Mode (System B)

Set the module operation mode of system B. For details on the module operation mode, refer to the following. Page 96 Module Operation Mode

Online Offline Module

Communication Test (Default: Online)

2 PARAMETER SETTINGS 2.4 Application Settings 101

10

3 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes troubleshooting of CC-Link IE Controller Network.

3.1 Checking with LED This section describes troubleshooting using LED. Error status can be determined by status of the RUN LED and the ERR LED.

*1 When multiple errors occur, the error status is displayed in the order of major, moderate, and minor.

For the RJ71EN71 or RnENCPU, whether the error occurs in the P1 or P2 can be checked with P ERR LED.

When the RUN LED turns off When the RUN LED turns off after powering on the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module, check the following.

If the above action does not solve the problem, perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure. ( Page 108 Module communication test)

When the ERR LED turns on or is flashing When the ERR LED turns on or is flashing, check the following.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the following tests to check for an error. Module communication test ( Page 108 Module communication test) Cable test ( Page 133 Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used))

RUN LED ERR LED Error status*1

Description

Off On, flashing Major error An error such as hardware failure or memory failure. The module stops operating.

On Flashing Moderate error An error, such as parameter error, which affect module operation. The module stops operating.

On On Minor error An error such as communication failure. The module continues operating.

Check item Action Is the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module mounted correctly?

Securely mount the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module on the base unit.

Check item Action Does any error occur in the module diagnostics? Take the actions displayed on the window.

Does any error occur in the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics? Correct "Network Range Assignment" in "Basic Settings" of the control station in accordance with the normal station actually connected.

Perform troubleshooting for when the D LINK LED turns off or is flashing in the disconnected station. ( Page 103 When the D LINK LED turns off or is flashing)

2 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.1 Checking with LED

3

When the D LINK LED turns off or is flashing When the D LINK LED turns off or is flashing, check the following.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the following tests to check for an error. Module communication test ( Page 108 Module communication test) Cable test ( Page 133 Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used))

Common (when optical fiber cables and Ethernet cables are used) check item

Action

Is the control station operating normally? If an error has occurred in the CPU module on the control station (sub-control station), eliminate the cause of the CPU module error. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Check if the control station (sub-control station) are performing data link using CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. ( Page 111 Checking the Network Status)

Is the control station connected to the network? Check if the control station (sub-control station) are performing data link using CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. ( Page 111 Checking the Network Status)

Does the communication cable used conform to the standard? Replace the communication cable with one conforming to the standard. ( MELSEC iQ- R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Does the station-to-station distance meet the specifications? Set the station-to-station distance within range. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Does the cabling condition (bending radius) meet the specifications?

Refer to the manual for the communication cable, and correct the bending radius.

Is any communication cable disconnected? Replace the communication cable.

Are 120 or more normal stations connected? Change the connection of the normal stations to 119 stations or less.

Are other stations connected to the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module normally?

Check if the modules on the other stations are performing data link using CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. ( Page 111 Checking the Network Status)

Check the operation status of modules on other stations. ( User's manual for the module used)

Are station numbers unique? Change the duplicated station number.

Is the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module with the supported firmware version used when the Process CPU is used and "Link points extended setting" is set to "Extend"?

Use the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module with the supported firmware version. ( Page 213 Added and Enhanced Functions)

Check item only when Ethernet cables are used Action Is a switching hub connected in ring topology? Configure the network in ring topology without a switching hub.

Is the switching hub used operating normally? Check if a switching hub which conforms the standard is used. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Power off and on the switching hub.

Check that the cables are not connected as described below. Both P1 and P2 are connected to the same switching hub. The network is configured in ring topology although "Network

Topology" under "Basic Settings" of the control station is set to "Line/Star".

The network is configured in star topology although "Network Topology" under "Basic Settings" of the control station is set to "Ring".

The network is incorrectly configured in ring topology.

Correct the wiring.

When the system does not contain a switching hub, take any of the following actions: For line topology, disconnect an Ethernet cable (either P1 or P2) connected to any

station on the network. The network topology will become a line topology and data link will start.

For ring topology, set "Network Topology" under "Basic Settings" of the control station to "Ring" and rewrite the parameters to the CPU module.

When the system contains a switching hub, take any of the following actions: Check if "Network Topology" under "Basic Settings" of the control station is set to "Ring".

Because the network cannot be configured in ring topology which contains a switching hub, set "Network Topology" to "Line/Star" and rewrite the parameters to the CPU module. When data link starts across the entire network, this procedure is successfully completed.

Disconnect one Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and power off and on the hub. (Repeat this operation until data link starts over the network.)

When data link starts over the network, check the network configuration using CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.1 Checking with LED 103

10

When the L ERR LED turns on (when optical fiber cables are used) When the L ERR LED turns on, check the following.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform troubleshooting for when communication is unstable. ( Page 142 When communication is unstable)

When the L ER LED turns on (when Ethernet cables are used) When the L ER LED turns on, check the following.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the following tests to check for an error. Module communication test ( Page 108 Module communication test) Troubleshooting for when communication is unstable ( Page 142 When communication is unstable)

When the LINK LED turns off (when Ethernet cables are used) When the LINK LED turns off, check the following.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the following tests to check for an error. Module communication test ( Page 108 Module communication test) Cable test ( Page 133 Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used))

Check item Action Are the communication cables used normally? Check if the communication cable which conforms the standard is used. ( MELSEC

iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup)) Check if the station-to-station distance is set within range. ( MELSEC iQ-R

Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup)) Check if the communication cables are not disconnected.

Are other stations connected to the RJ71GP21(S)-SX normal? Check if the other stations are performing data link using CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. ( Page 111 Checking the Network Status)

Is "Module Operation Mode" under "Application Settings" of the control station set to one other than "Online"?

Set "Module Operation Mode" under "Application Settings" of the control station to "Online".

Check item Action Are the Ethernet cables used normally? Check if the Ethernet cable which conforms the standard is used. ( MELSEC iQ-R

Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup)) Check if the station-to-station distance is set within range. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/

CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup)) Check if the Ethernet cables are not disconnected.

Is the switching hub used operating normally? Check if a switching hub which conforms the standard is used. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Power off and on the switching hub.

Is there any source of noise near the module or cables? Change the location of the module or cables.

Is "Network Topology" under "Basic Settings" of the control station set to "Ring"?

Check if the ring topology is correctly configured for the port where the L ER LED is on. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Check item Action Do the used Ethernet cables conform to the Ethernet standard? Replace the cables with the Ethernet cable which conforms the standard. ( MELSEC

iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Does the station-to-station distance meet the specifications? Set the station-to-station distance within range. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Does the cabling condition (bending radius) meet the specifications?

Refer to the manual for the Ethernet cable, and correct the bending radius.

Is any Ethernet cable disconnected? Replace the Ethernet cable.

Is the switching hub used operating normally? Check if a switching hub which conforms the standard is used. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Power off and on the switching hub.

Are other stations connected to the RJ71EN71 and the RnENCPU (network part) normally?

Check if the modules on the other stations are performing data link using CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. ( Page 111 Checking the Network Status)

Check the operation status of modules on other stations. ( User's manual for the module used)

4 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.1 Checking with LED

3

When the EXT PW LED turns off When the EXT PW LED turns off, check the following.

If the above action does not solve the problem, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the RJ71GP21S-SX. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

Check item Action Is the external power supply connected to the RJ71GP21S-SX? Connect the external power supply to the RJ71GP21S-SX.

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.1 Checking with LED 105

10

3.2 Checking the Module Status The following items can be checked in the "Module Diagnostics" window for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

Error information Check the details of the error currently occurring and action to remove the error.

Item Description Error Information Displays the details of the errors currently occurring.

Click the [Event History] button to check the history of errors that have occurred on the network, errors detected for each module, and operations that have been executed.

Module Information List Displays various status information of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

Supplementary Function

CC IE Control Diagnostics Enables checking the cause to resolve the problem when an error occurs in CC-Link IE Controller Network. ( Page 111 Checking the Network Status)

Item Description Status Major: An error such as hardware failure or memory failure. The module stops operating.

Moderate: An error, such as parameter error, which affect module operation. The module stops operating.

Minor: An error such as communication failure. The module continues operating.

Detailed Information Displays detailed information about each error (maximum of 3 pieces).

Cause Displays the detailed error causes.

Corrective Action Displays the actions to eliminate the error causes.

6 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.2 Checking the Module Status

3

Module information list Switch to the [Module Information List] tab to check various status information of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

Item Description LED information Displays the LED status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

Individual information

Station Type Displays the station type set for the module selected.

Network No. Displays the network number set for the module selected.

Station Number Displays the station number set for the selected module.

Transient transmission group No. Displays the transient transmission group number set for the selected module.

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.2 Checking the Module Status 107

10

Module communication test The module communication test checks the hardware of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. When the communication using the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module is unstable, whether a hardware failure occurs or not can be checked. The following list the tests performed.

Procedure (for a system other than a redundant system) 1. Set the module operation mode to module communication test mode in the following item.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Target module [Module Parameter] [Application Settings] [Module Operation Mode]

2. Perform the following. For the RJ71GP21(S)-SX: Connect IN connector and OUT connector with optical fiber cables. For the RJ71EN71: Connect the P1 and P2 with an Ethernet cable. For the RnENCPU: Connect the P1 and P2 with an Ethernet cable.

3. Write the module parameters to the CPU module.

4. Reset or power off and on the CPU module to start the module communication test.

Do not perform a module communication test while connected to another station. The operation of another station may failed.

For the RJ71EN71 or RnENCPU, when "Port 1 Network Type" is set to "Ethernet" and "Port 2 Network Type" is set to "CC-Link IE Control", set both of the P1 and P2 to "Module Communication Test".

Procedure (for a redundant system) To perform a module communication test for a redundant system, set the operation mode to separate mode. Before execution, perform system switching in advance so that the module communication test target station operates as the standby system. The following describes a procedure for executing a module communication test for the RJ71GP21(S)-SX of system B.

1. Set the module operation mode of system A to online mode in the following item.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Target module [Module Parameter] [Application Settings] [Module Operation Mode]

2. Set the module operation mode of system B to module communication test mode in the following item.

[Navigation window] [Parameter] [Module Information] Target module [Module Parameter] [Application Settings] [Redundant System Settings] [Module Operation Mode (System B)]

3. Connect the IN connector and OUT connector of the RJ71GP21(S)-SX of system B together using optical fiber cables.

4. Set the system B CPU module to the STOP state.

5. Write the module parameters to the system B CPU module.

6. Reset or power off and on the system B CPU module to start a module communication test.

Test item Description Internal self-loopback test Checks whether the communication function of the module can be performed normally.

External self-loopback test Checks whether the communication can be performed normally with the cable connected between two connectors.

8 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.2 Checking the Module Status

3

To perform a module communication test on system A, set the module operation mode of system A to module communication test mode and the module operation mode of system B to online mode.

When returning the module to a normal operation state after the test, reconnect the optical fiber cable as before the test, and then execute the CPU module memory copy to transfer the parameters of the control system to the standby system. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Do not perform a module communication test while connected to another station. The operation of another station may failed.

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.2 Checking the Module Status 109

11

Checking the status and result of module communication test. The test status and result can be checked with LED indication of the module.

When optical fiber cables are used, the error number when the test abnormally ended is indicated in the dot matrix LED as shown below.

When Ethernet cables are used, the dot matrix LED indicates the error number with the form of "Port number Error number". For example, "1 3" is displayed when error No.3 occurs in P1.

Test status LED indication Test in progress The dot matrix LED indicates "UCT".

Completed normally The dot matrix LED indicates "OK".

Abnormal end The ERR LED turns on and the dot matrix LED indicates "ERR" and error number alternately at intervals of 1 second.

Error No.

Error detection connector

Description Action

1_1 IN connector Internal self- loopback test failure

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

2_1 OUT connector

1_2 IN connector External self- loopback test connection error

Check the optical fiber cable connection or replace the cable, and perform the test again. If the test fails again, Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.2_2 OUT

connector

1_3 IN connector External self- loopback test communication error

Replace the optical fiber cable and perform the test again. If the test fails again, Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.2_3 OUT

connector

Error number

Description Action

1 Internal self-loopback test failure

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

2 External self-loopback test connection error

Check the Ethernet cable connection or replace the Ethernet cable, and perform the test again. If the test fails again, Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

3 External self-loopback test communication error

Replace the Ethernet cable and perform the test again. If the test fails again, Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

0 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.2 Checking the Module Status

3

3.3 Checking the Network Status Perform the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics to check the network status and error details or to perform an operation test for troubleshooting.

When optical fiber cables are used This section describes the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics when optical fiber cables are used.

Diagnostic items The following table lists items that can be diagnosed by the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

: Diagnosed, : Not diagnosed

*1 When starting the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics with a setting other than "No Specification" in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window, use the engineering tool of the version 1.035M or later.

Item "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window

Restrictions Reference

"No Specification"

Other than "No Specification"*1

(1) Network information display

Network map and error status

Page 116 Diagnostics window

Cable disconnection and disconnected station

(2) Display Selected Station Network Equipment Status

Status of the selected station and the error definition

(3) Test Confirmation Communication Test This can be selected when the selected station is an engineering tool connected station (own station). This cannot be selected when the selected station is another station.

Page 43 Communication test

IP Communication Test Page 49 IP communication test

Link Start/Stop This can be selected when the selected station is an engineering tool connected station (own station). This cannot be selected when the selected station is another station.

Page 134 Link Start/ Stop

(4) Selected Station Operation

Remote Operation When the selected station is other than MELSEC iQ-R series, this function cannot be executed.

Page 138 Remote Operation

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 111

11

Starting diagnostics This section describes how to use the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

When "No Specification" is specified in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window

1. Connect the engineering tool to the CPU module. If a normal station cannot be monitored due to an error such as cable disconnection, directly connect the engineering tool to the normal station.

2. Start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics (Optical Cable)]

In a redundant system, the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics cannot be started when a system has been specified in "Specify Redundant CPU" of "Target System" in the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window. Directly connect the engineering tool to the station to be diagnosed, and specify the own remote head module (set "Not Specified" in "Specify Redundant CPU"), and start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

3. When the following window opens, select the RJ71GP21(S)-SX to be diagnosed and click the [OK] button to start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

Modules are listed in the order configured in module information.

When multiple CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules of the same network number are mounted on the same base unit, the module with the smallest start I/O number is always diagnosed, regardless of setting.

4. Select the station to be diagnosed from "Selected Station" or "Network information display". An icon indicating an error is displayed on the station icon of the station where an error occurs. A disconnected station that has performed data link is indicated with the icon in the disconnected station. An icon is displayed on the cable where a communication error occurs. To check the details of the communication error,

click the neighboring stations of the icon of the communication error.

2 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

When the station to be diagnosed cannot be selected, the status of network number disparity, control station duplication, or station number duplication cannot be checked using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. Check the error details by directly connecting the engineering tool to the CPU module where an error occurs, and opening the "System Monitor" window.

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 113

11

5. The status of a station selected in "Network information display" is displayed in "Display Selected Station Network Equipment Status". ( Page 119 Select station network device status display)

The station status is displayed on the top of "Display Selected Station Network Equipment Status". If an error occurs, a button indicating the error such as [Cable Disconnected on OUT Side] is displayed in "Display Selected Station Network Equipment Status". Click the button to check the error details and actions.

6. Various tests and operations can be performed by clicking the "Test Confirmation" or "Selected Station Operation" on the bottom left of the window. ( Page 134 Procedure to Page 138 Precautions)

When a setting other than "No Specification" is specified in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window

1. Connect the engineering tool to the CPU module.

2. Start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics (Optical Cable)]

In a redundant system, the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics cannot be started when a system has been specified in "Specify Redundant CPU" of "Target System" in the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window. Directly connect the engineering tool to the station to be diagnosed, and specify the own remote head module (set "Not Specified" in "Specify Redundant CPU"), and start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

The CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics cannot be started when "Other Station (Co-existence Network)" has been specified in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window and "CC-Link" or "C24" has been specified in "Co-existence Network Route".

Click.

The status of the selected station is displayed.

Various tests and operations can be performed.

4 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

3. Select the RJ71GP21(S)-SX of the diagnostics-target network number and click the [OK] button to start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

Although the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the network to which the relay sending station belongs can be started, that of the network to which the relay receiving station belongs cannot be started.

To start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics, specify the network number and station number of the relay receiving station or relay sending station for "Network No." and "Station No." in "Network Communication Route" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window. For example, to start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the network number 2, specify the network number 1 and station number 4, or the network number 2 and station number 1 in "Network No." and "Station No.".

The CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics can be started for stations of up to eight networks ahead (number of relay stations: 7) including the station directly connected to the engineering tool. However, for the stations of five networks ahead (number of relay stations: 4) or later, it can be started only when the firmware version of the RJ71GP21-SX or RJ71GP21S-SX is "18" or later.

4. Step 4 and later is the same procedure as when "No Specification" is specified in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window. ( Page 112 When "No Specification" is specified in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window)

Precautions If the communication path includes the following items, the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics cannot be started. MELSECNET/H Multidrop connection with a serial communication module Interface board for a personal computer GOT (when the transparent function is used) MELSEC-Q/L series network module

Station No.1

Station No.3

Station No.4

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.4

Station No.3

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.3

Network No.1 Network No.3

Network No.2

Engineering tool

Relay sending station

Relay receiving station

Relay sending station

Relay receiving station

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 115

11

Diagnostics window

Item Description [Change Module] button Changes the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module to be diagnosed when multiple CC-Link IE

Controller Network-equipped modules are mounted. However, when multiple CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules of the same network number are mounted on the same base unit, the module with the smallest start I/O number is always diagnosed, regardless of setting.

Selected Station Specifies the station number of the station to be diagnosed. A station to be diagnosed can also be selected by clicking the station icon displayed in "Network information display".

[Change Station] button Clicking the station number in "Selected Station" will change the select station.

[Start Monitoring] button Starts monitoring of the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

[Stop Monitoring] button Stops monitoring of the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

Network information display

Module Displays the module number of the network being diagnosed.

Network information display

6 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

Network information display

Network No. Displays the network number of the network being diagnosed.

Total Number of Stations Indicates the total number of stations (sum of control stations and normal stations) set in "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings".

I/O Master Station

Block 1: Indicates the station number of the I/O master station of block 1.

Block 2: Indicates the station number of the I/O master station of block 2.

Network Type Displays "CC-Link IE Control Extended Mode" or "CC-Link IE Control".

Icon Indicates the network map and the status of each station.

If the status is not displayed, check that there is only one control station in the system and no station number is overlapped.

Station number

1 to 120: The station number of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module is displayed. Control/Standby: The stations of the control system and standby system of a redundant system is displayed.*1

A/B: The stations of system A and system B of a redundant system is displayed. Undefined: The station for which parameters have not been set or station No. is not assigned is displayed.

Connected station

Displayed the station (own station) where the engineering tool is connected.

Current control station

Displayed to the station actually operating as control station.

Specified control station

Displayed for the station set as the control station by module parameters.

Icon The station icons that may be displayed are listed below.

Normally operating station

Faulty station (A fault has occurred on a module and cable while cyclic transmission is performed.) If a station that is not cleared an error is to be a connected station, the icon at the station that is cleared an error still indicates as a faulty station even after the following error information is cleared at a faulty station. 'Clear IN-side transmission error count' (SB0007) 'Clear OUT-side transmission error count' (SB0008)

When error information is cleared at a connected station, the icon at the station that is cleared an error will indicate as a normally operating station.

Faulty station (Cyclic transmission is stopped.)

Station in a different shared group (No cyclic data are received.)

Disconnected station (black)

Reserved station (gray)

Selected station (station icon edged with green) This can be selected by clicking a station icon or moving a focus and holding down a space bar. The station status is displayed at "Display Selected Station Network Equipment Status". Disconnected station and reserved station cannot be selected.

Focusing (station icon edged with dotted line) This can be selected by holding down a space bar. Disconnected station and reserved station cannot be selected.

Communication error If the station adjacent to the one where a communication error occurs is selected, the station

status is displayed at "Display Selected Station Network Equipment Status".

Item Description

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 117

11

*1 When a stop error occurs in the CPU modules of both systems, both systems are displayed as the standby system.

Acquisition of normal connection information The normal connection information is network configuration data that the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module on the engineering tool connected station stores in its memory when all stations are normal. When all of the following conditions are met, the normal connection information can be obtained. Also, after any of the conditions became unsatisfied, if all of them are met again, the normal connection information will be updated. Data link status is all stations normal. ('Data link error status of each station' (SB00B0) is off.) No loopback station ('Loopback status' (SB0065) is off.) No station has a parameter error. ('Parameter error status of each station' (SB00E0) is off.) The number of actually connected stations is the same as the total of stations that is set for the control station (except

reserved stations).

When multiple stations on the same system have the same network number, if a station other than those on the system is selected while a station of the lowest start I/O number has a baton pass error, a transient execution error (no baton passing on the own station) (E504H) will occur. Execute again after correcting the baton pass error.

Network information display

Display position of a disconnected station

When normal connection information has been obtained ( Page 118 Acquisition of normal connection information) The disconnected station (station No.4) is displayed in the position where it was connected when normal.

When normal connection information has not been obtained The disconnected station (station No.4) is displayed on the IN side of the engineering tool connected station.

[Previous] button When the total number of stations is 61 or more, the window prior to "Network information display" is displayed by clicking this button.

[Next] button When the total number of stations is 61 or more, the window next to "Network information display" is displayed by clicking this button.

Current link scan time Indicates the link scan time of the displayed network.

Display Selected Station Network Equipment Status

Indicates status of the station selected in "Network information display". For details on "Display Selected Station Network Equipment Status", refer to the following. Page 119 Select station network device status display

Test Confirmation

[Communication Test] button

Performs a communication test. ( Page 43 Communication test)

[IP Communication Test] button

Performs an IP communication test. ( Page 49 IP communication test)

[Link Start/Stop] button Starts or stops cyclic transmission. ( Page 134 Procedure)

Selected Station Operation

[Remote Operation] button Performs remote operation (such as RUN, STOP, or RESET operations) to the CPU module. ( Page 138 Precautions)

Item Description

8 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

Select station network device status display Indicates status of the station selected in "Network information display".

When a station where an error has occurred is selected

When a transient transmission error occurs, check the error description in error code and take action. When multiple stations on the same system have the same network number: If a station other than those on

the system is selected while a station of the lowest start I/O number has a baton pass error, a transient execution error (no baton passing on the own station) (E504H) will occur. Execute again after correcting the baton pass error.

No. Description (1) Indicates the operating status.

Station No.: Normal operation Station No. Error (yellow): Error (Data link is continued.) Station No. Error (red): Error (Data link is stopped.)

(2) The network type is displayed.

(3) The transient transmission group number of the selected station is displayed.

(4) The shared group number of the selected station is displayed.

(5) An IP address is displayed. (only when it is set).

(6) Mode is displayed.

(7) Click this button to check error details. Take actions following the description displayed in "Error Factor" and "Troubleshooting".

(8) The LED status of a module and communication status of IN connector and OUT connector is displayed. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

(9) Communication status Properly connected

Error (cable disconnection)

Error (other than cable disconnection)

Module error (CC-Link IE Controller Network parameter setting error or transient transmission error)

(9)

(1)

(7)

(8)

(2)

(4) (5)

(6)

(3)

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 119

12

When a redundant system station is selected

*1 When a stop error occurs in the CPU modules of both systems, both systems are displayed as the standby system.

No. Description (1) Indicates that the station is set as a redundant system.

(2) The status of the selected station in a redundant system (control system/standby system and system A/system B) is displayed.*1

(1) (2)

0 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

When Ethernet cables are used This section describes the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics when Ethernet cables are used.

Diagnostic items The following table lists items that can be diagnosed by the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

: Diagnosed, : Not diagnosed

*1 When starting the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics with a setting other than "No Specification" in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window, use the engineering tool of the version 1.035M or later.

Item "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window

Reference

"No Specification" Other than "No Specification"*1

(1) Network information display

Network map and error status Page 126 Diagnostics window

Cable disconnection and disconnected station

(2) Selected Station Communication Status Monitor (RJ71EN71)

Status of the selected station and the error definition

(3) Operation Test Communication Test Page 43 Communication test

IP Communication Test Page 49 IP communication test

Cable Test Page 133 Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used)

Link Start/Stop Page 134 Link Start/Stop

(4) Selected Station Operation

Remote Operation Page 138 Remote Operation

(1)

(2) (4)

(3)

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 121

12

Starting diagnostics This section describes how to use the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

When "No Specification" is specified in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window

1. Connect the engineering tool to the CPU module. If a normal station cannot be monitored due to an error such as cable disconnection, directly connect the engineering tool to the normal station.

2. Start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics (Twisted Pair Cable)]

3. When the following window opens, select the module to be diagnosed and click the [OK] button to start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

Modules are listed in the order configured in module information.

However, when multiple RJ71EN71s and RnENCPUs of the same network number are mounted on the same base unit, the module with the smallest start I/O number is always diagnosed, regardless of setting.

4. Select the station to be diagnosed from "Select Station" or in "Network Status". An icon indicating an error is displayed on the module icon of the station where an error occurs. A disconnected station that has performed data link is indicated with the "Disconnected Station" icon in the network map.

However, a disconnected station in following case is displayed on the right end of the area.

The "Error" icon is displayed on the icon of a cable where a communication error occurs. To check the details of the communication error, click the neighboring stations of the "Error" icon.

The "Error (Illegal loop connection detected)" icon is displayed if the network is configured in ring topology although "Network Topology" of "Basic Settings" of the control station is set to "Line/Star".

The "Error (Illegal loop connection detected)" icon is displayed if the network is configured in star topology although "Network Topology" of "Basic Settings" of the control station is set to "Ring".

Stations displayed on the right end of the area. A station that was reconnected to a network after disconnecting/inserting the cable or powering off and on the system, and remains disconnected. A disconnected station with the station icon deleted in the network map by clicking the [Update] button

2 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

The "Error (Illegal loop connection detected)" icon is displayed if the network is incorrectly configured in ring topology.

When the station to be diagnosed cannot be selected, the status of network number disparity, control station duplication, or station number duplication cannot be checked using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. Check the error details by directly connecting the engineering tool to the CPU module where an error occurs, and opening the "System Monitor" window.

5. The status of a station selected in "Network Status" is displayed in "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor". ( Page 126 Diagnostics window)

The station status is displayed on the top of "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor". If an error occurs, a button indicating the error such as [PORT2 Communication Error] is displayed in "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor". Click the button to check the error details and actions.

6. Various tests and operations can be performed by clicking the "Operation Test" or "Selected Station Operation" on the bottom left of the window. (Page 134 Link Start/Stop to Page 138 Remote Operation)

Disconnected station

Click.

The status of the selected station is displayed.

Various tests and operations can be performed.

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 123

12

When a setting other than "No Specification" is specified in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window

1. Connect the engineering tool to the CPU module.

2. Start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics (Twisted Pair Cable)]

The CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics cannot be started when "Other Station (Co-existence Network)" has been specified in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window and "CC-Link" or "C24" has been specified in "Co-existence Network Route".

3. Select the module of the diagnostics-target network number and click the [OK] button to start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

Although the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the network to which the relay sending station belongs can be started, that of the network to which the relay receiving station belongs cannot be started.

To start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the network to which the relay sending station belongs, specify the network number and station number of the relay receiving station or relay sending station for "Network No." and "Station No." in "Network Communication Route" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window. For example, to start the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the network number 2, specify the network number 1 and station number 4, or the network number 2 and station number 1 in "Network No." and "Station No.".

The CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics can be started for stations of up to eight networks ahead (number of relay stations: 7) including the station directly connected to the engineering tool. However, for the stations of five networks ahead (number of relay stations: 4) or later, it can be started only when the firmware version of the RJ71EN71 is "18" or later.

4. Step 4 and later is the same procedure as when "No Specification" is specified in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window. ( Page 122 When "No Specification" is specified in "Other Station Setting" on the "Specify Connection Destination Connection" window)

Station No.1

Station No.3

Station No.4

Station No.1

Station No.2

Station No.2

Station No.4

Station No.3

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.3

Network No.1 Network No.3

Network No.2

Engineering tool

Relay sending station

Relay receiving station

Relay sending station

Relay receiving station

4 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

Precautions If the communication path includes the following items, the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics cannot be started. MELSECNET/H Multidrop connection with a serial communication module Interface board for a personal computer GOT (when the transparent function is used) MELSEC-Q/L series network module

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 125

12

Diagnostics window

Item Description Select Diagnostics Destination

Module Displays the RJ71EN71 or the RnENCPU (network part) being diagnosed.

[Change Module] button Changes the RJ71EN71 or the RnENCPU (network part) to be diagnosed when multiple modules are mounted. However, when multiple RJ71EN71s or the RnENCPUs (network part) of the same network number are mounted on the same base unit, the module with the smallest start I/O number is always diagnosed, regardless of setting.

Selected Station Selects the station number of the station to be diagnosed. A station to be diagnosed can also be selected by clicking the module icon displayed in the network map.

Monitor Status [Start Monitoring] button Starts monitoring of the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

[Stop Monitoring] button Stops monitoring of the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

[Update] button When the firmware version of the control station is "05" or later: If the actual network configuration and network map of the diagnostic window are inconsistent with each other, clicking this button executes the network map update to make them match. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

When the firmware version of the control station is "04" or earlier: Deletes a disconnected station displayed in the network map. The deleted station is displayed in the disconnected station monitor area.

[Legend] button Indicates the meaning of icons displayed in the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

Network map Disconnected station monitor area

6 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

Network Status Total Number of Stations (Parameter)

Indicates the total number of stations (sum of control stations and normal stations) set in "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings".

Total Number of Stations (Connected)

Indicates the total number of stations (sum of control stations and normal stations) during data link on CC- Link IE Controller Network.

Current link scan time Indicates the link scan time of the displayed network.

Number of Station Errors Detected

Indicates the number of error stations in the displayed network.

Constant Link Scan Setting Value

Indicates the setting value of the "Constant Link Scan" under "Supplementary Cyclic Settings" of "Application Settings".

I/O Master Station

Block 1 Indicates the station number of the I/O master station of block 1.

Block 2 Indicates the station number of the I/O master station of block 2.

Network map Indicates the network map and the status of each station. If the status is not displayed, check that there is only one control station in the system and no station number is overlapped. For details on the network map, refer to the following. Page 129 Network map

Disconnected station monitor area

Displays a disconnected station that has been set in "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings" but has not yet performed data link. However, even if a disconnected station had performed data link, it is displayed in this area in the following cases. A station that was reconnected to a network after disconnecting/inserting the cable or powering off and

on the system, and remains disconnected. A disconnected station with the station icon deleted in the network map by clicking the [Update] button

The "Other Modules" icon indicates a station that has not yet performed data link. Icons other than "Other Modules" icon indicate stations that had performed data link before disconnection. For details on the displayed icon, click the [Legend] button.

Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Displays status of the station selected in "Network Status". For details on "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor", refer to the following. Page 132 Selected Station Communication Status Monitor

Operation Test [Communication Test] button Performs a communication test. ( Page 43 Communication test)

[IP Communication Test] button

Performs an IP communication test. ( Page 49 IP communication test)

[Cable Test] button Performs a cable test. ( Page 133 Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used))

[Link Start/Stop] button Starts or stops cyclic transmission. ( Page 134 Link Start/Stop)

Selected Station Operation

[Remote Operation] button Performs remote operation (such as RUN, STOP, or RESET operations) to the CPU module. ( Page 138 Remote Operation)

Item Description

Disconnected station monitor area

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 127

12

When "Error (Illegal loop connection detected)" icon is displayed When "Error (Illegal loop connection detected)" icon is displayed in "Network Status", take following actions.

When the system does not contain a switching hub The network is configured in ring topology although "Network Topology" of "Basic Settings" of the control station is set to "Line/Star". Take any of the following actions.

When the system contains a switching hub The "Error (Illegal loop connection detected)" icon is displayed due to any of the following causes. The network is configured in ring topology although "Network Topology" of "Basic Settings" is set to "Line/Star". The network is configured in star topology although "Network Topology" under "Basic Settings" is set to "Ring". The switching hub is connected with "Network Topology" under "Basic Settings" of the control station being set to "Ring". Take the following actions.

Action Disconnect an Ethernet cable connected to any station on the network (either P1 or P2). The network topology will become a line topology and data link will start.

To configure the network in a ring topology, set "Network Topology" under "Basic Settings" of the control station to "Ring" and rewrite the parameters to the CPU module.

Action

1. Check if "Network Topology" under "Basic Settings" of the control station is different from the network configuration. If so, correct "Network Topology" and rewrite it to the CPU module. When data link starts across the entire network, this procedure is successfully completed.

If data link does not start, perform step 2 and 3.

2. When "Network Topology" of "Basic Settings" of the control station is set to "Line/Star", take the following actions. Disconnect one Ethernet cable connected to the switching hub and power off and on the hub. (Repeat this operation until

data link starts over the network.) When data link starts over the network, check the network configuration using CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

The procedure is successfully completed. ( Page 111 Checking the Network Status)

3. When "Network Topology" of "Basic Settings" of the control station is set to "Ring", take the following actions. Configure the network in ring topology without a switching hub. Connecting a switching hub will cause a problem such as

data link failure. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

8 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

Network map Icon The module type and station number are displayed with an icon.

Click: Selection Right-click: Test or debug

execution. keys on the

keyboard: Move the focus to the module to be diagnosed, and determine it with the key.

No. Description (1) Displayed the station (own station) where the engineering tool is connected.

(2) Displayed the station type and station number. "?" is displayed when a station number has not been set. When the background of the text if colored, the relevant station may have been set as a reserved station or an error invalid station. Click the [Legend] button to check the meaning of the background colors.

(3) Module status is displayed. Click the [Legend] button to check the meaning of the icon. When "Error (Illegal loop connection detected)" icon is displayed, take actions displayed in "Troubleshooting" of "Error Details". ( Page 132 When a station where an error has occurred is selected)

(4) A port to which an Ethernet cable is connected is displayed.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 129

13

Network map A network map is displayed according to the connection status.

System configuration Display of the network map

Star topology

Line topology

Star and line mixed

Ring topology

Engineering tool Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.4)

Switching hub

Engineering tool

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Engineering tool Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.4)

Normal station (station No.5)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.6)

Switching hub Connection to P1

Connection to P2

Engineering tool

Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

0 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

In the following cases, the network map that is different from the actual system configuration is displayed.

System configuration Display of the network map Two stations are connected through a switching hub. Branches are not displayed in the network map.

Switching hubs are in cascade connection. Only one branch is displayed.

Engineering tool Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Switching hub

Engineering tool Control station (station No.1)

Normal station (station No.2)

Normal station (station No.3)

Normal station (station No.5)

Normal station (station No.4)

Switching hub

Switching hub

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 131

13

Selected Station Communication Status Monitor Displays status of the station selected in "Network Status". When the network type of the RJ71EN71 is set to "E+CCIEC" or the network type of the RnENCPU is set to "E+IEC", status of P1 is not displayed.

When a station where an error has occurred is selected

No. Description (1) The operating status is displayed.

Station No.: Normal operation Station No. Error (yellow): Error (Data link is continued.) Station No. Error (red): Error (Data link is stopped.)

(2) Mode is displayed.

(3) The network type is displayed.

(4) A MAC address is displayed.

(5) The transient transmission group number is displayed.

(6) The shared group number is displayed. (only when the shared group number is set)

(7) An IP address is displayed. (only when it is set).

(8) Click this button to check error details. Take actions following the description displayed in "Error Factor" and "Troubleshooting".

(9) The LED status of a module and communication status of P1 and P2 is displayed. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

(10) Status of the cables connected to P1 and P2 is displayed.

(1)

(6)

(9)

(10)

(8)

(4)

(2)

(5)

(7)

(3)

2 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used) Cable test checks if the Ethernet cables are properly connected. Only the Ethernet cable connected to the P1 or P2 of the target station is tested. For the whole network status, check the network map or "Selected Station Communication Status Monitor" of the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. ( Page 111 Checking the Network Status)

Procedure 1. Start the CC-Link IE Controller Network

diagnostics.

[Diagnostics] [CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics (Twisted Pair Cable)]

2. Click the [Cable Test] button in the "CC- Link IE Control Diagnostics" window.

"Cable Test" window is displayed.

3. Enter a station number and click the [Execute Test] button to operate the test.

If an error occurs, take actions according to the error message.

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 133

13

Link Start/Stop This function stops the cyclic transmission during debugging and other operations. (Data reception from other stations and data sending from the own station are stopped.) Also, the stopped cyclic transmission is restarted. This function does not stop or restart transient transmission.

Cyclic transmission can be started and stopped using link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW). ( Page 166 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas, Page 179 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas)

LB

LW

LB

LW

LB

LW

LB

LW

CPU module

Device

Control stationCPU module

Device

Station No.1

Range of the station No.1 sending data

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.4

Device Range of the station No.1 sending data

Station No.2

Station No.3

Station No.4

Normal station

Station No.2

Range of the station No.2 sending data

Station No.3

Station No.4

Range of the station No.2 sending data

Station No.3

Station No.4

Normal station

Station No.3

Station No.2

Range of the station No.3 sending data

Station No.4

Station No.2

Range of the station No.3 sending data

Station No.4

Normal station

Station No.4

Station No.2

Station No.3

Range of the station No.4 sending data

Station No.2

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.1

Station No.3

Range of the station No.4 sending data

Device

Cyclic transmission stopped

4 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

Procedure when optical fiber cables are used

When target stations are collectively specified Group specification: Right-click on the line of "Transient Transmission Group No.", and select "Group Selection". All stations specification: Right-click on the "All Stations Status" area, and select "Select All". Also, selecting "Deselect All"

will cancel all the selection.

1. Click the [Link Start/Stop] button in the "CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics" window. Or right-click a station icon in "Network information display" and click [Link Start/ Stop].

"Link Start/Stop" window is displayed.

2. Select a target station for starting or stopping cyclic transmission in "Selected Status".

When the engineering tool is connected to a normal station, only the own station can be selected. The station to which the engineering tool is connected can be checked in "Network information display".

3. Select whether to start or stop cyclic transmission in "Link Start/Stop".

Selecting "Forced Link Start" will forcibly start cyclic transmission of the station where cyclic transmission was stopped by a command from another station or by link special relay (SB) or link special register (SW).

4. Click the [Execute] button. The execution status of cyclic transmission can be checked in "Link Status".

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 135

13

Procedure when Ethernet cables are used

When target stations are collectively specified Group specification: Select the line of which "Transient Transmission Group No." is not 0 and click the [Group No.

Selection] button. All stations specification: Click the [Select All] button. Also, clicking the [Deselect All] button will cancel all the selection.

When the CPU module is reset or the system is powered off and on Even if cyclic transmission has been stopped by this function, it will restart.

1. Click the [Link Start/Stop] button in the "CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics" window. Or right-click a module icon in "Network Status" and click "Link Start/Stop".

"Link Start/Stop" window is displayed.

2. Select a station for starting or stopping cyclic transmission in "Selected Status".

3. Select whether to start or stop cyclic transmission in "Link Start/Stop".

Selecting "Forced Link Start" will forcibly start cyclic transmission of the station where cyclic transmission was stopped by a command from another station or by link special relay (SB) or link special register (SW).

4. Click the [Execute] button.

6 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

Stations to which the link start cannot be executed The link start cannot be executed to the following stations. Link startup/stop processing station*1

Station where cyclic transmission was stopped due to an error Station where link was stopped by a command from another station*1

Station where link was stopped by link special relay (SB) or link special register (SW)*1

*1 Performing Forced Link Start will start the link.

Precautions When "Link Start" is executed, the cyclic transmission is not restarted and the error definition is not stored in 'System link startup result' (SW0051) in the following cases. Check if the data link is being performed normally using the CC-Link IE Controller diagnostics and 'Data link status of each station' (SW00B0 to SW00B7) after the cyclic transmission is restarted by executing Forced Link Start, resetting the CPU module, or powering off and on the system. When executing "Link Start/Stop" from another station to the station where cyclic transmission was stopped by executing

"Link Start" in the own station or 'Link stop of own station' (SB0001). When executing "Link Start" from another station C to the station A where "Link Stop" was executed from another station B

(including when "Link Start" for the own station and station A is executed by specifying multiple stations)

The conditions that the link startup cannot execute due to the link startup/stop processing When the link startup/stop is executed at the same station while the link startup/stop is being executed.

When the link startup/stop is executed at a station that either of the following link special relay (SB) is on. 'Link startup of own station' (SB0000) 'Link stop of own station' (SB0001) 'System link startup' (SB0002) 'System link stop' (SB0003)

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status 137

13

Remote Operation This function executes remote operations (such as RUN, STOP, and RESET operations) to the station selected on the "CC- Link IE Control Diagnostics" window, from the engineering tool.

Procedure To perform remote operation, follow the steps below.

*1 To perform remote RESET, preset "Remote Reset Setting" under "Operation Related Setting" to "Enable" in the CPU Parameters.

For details on the remote operations, refer to user's manual for the CPU module used.

1. Select the module where the remote operations are performed in the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

2. Click the [Remote Operation] button in the "CC-Link IE Control Diagnostics" window. Or right-click a station icon in the "Network information display" and click [Remote Operation].

"Remote Operation" window is displayed.

3. Specify the target station in "Specify Execution Target". "Currently Specified Station": A remote operation is

executed only to the CPU module on the station selected in the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics.

"All Stations Specified": A remote operation is performed on all stations on the network specified by "Specify Execution Target".

"Specify Group No.": A remote operation is performed only on stations with the specified group number on the network specified by "Specify Execution Target".

4. Select a remote operation (RUN, STOP, PAUSE, or RESET) to be performed in "Operation".*1

5. Click the [Execute] button to perform the remote operation.

8 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.3 Checking the Network Status

3

3.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom This section describes troubleshooting method by symptom. Perform these troubleshooting if data link cannot be performed even though no error is detected in the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. If an error has occurred in the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module, identify the error cause using the engineering tool. ( Page 111 Checking the Network Status)

When cyclic transmission cannot be performed The following lists the actions to be taken if cyclic transmission cannot be performed.

If the above action does not solve the problem, perform the module communication test to check for hardware failure. ( Page 108 Module communication test)

Check item Action Is the D LINK LED of the control or normal station turned off or flashing?

Perform troubleshooting for when the D LINK LED turns off or is flashing. ( Page 103 When the D LINK LED turns off or is flashing)

Is a target station specified as a reserved station in "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings" of the control station?

Cancel the reserved station setting. ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment)

Has "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings" of the control station been set?

Set "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings" of the control station. ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment)

Is there any station which exceed total number of stations set in "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings" of the control station?

Correct station numbers. ( Page 75 Station Number)

Are station numbers unique? Change the duplicated station number. ( Page 75 Station Number)

Is the range set in "Refresh Setting" of "Basic Settings" correct? Correct the range setting in "Refresh Setting" of "Basic Settings" ( Page 84 Refresh Setting)

Is any refresh target device in "Refresh Setting" of "Basic Settings" overlapped with that of another network module?

Correct the range setting in "Refresh Setting" of "Basic Settings". ( Page 84 Refresh Setting)

Are the transfer ranges set in "Interlink Transmission Settings" of "Application Settings" correct?

Correct the transfer ranges set in "Interlink Transmission Settings" of "Application Settings". ( Page 97 Interlink Transmission Settings)

Are the source and destination modules set in "Interlink Transmission Settings" of "Application Settings" correct?

Correct the source and destination modules set in "Interlink Transmission Settings" of "Application Settings". ( Page 97 Interlink Transmission Settings)

Are the shared group numbers correctly set for the target station? Correct the shared group numbers same as those for the target station. ( Page 81 Shared Group)

Is the setting value of data link monitoring time shorter than that of actual link scan time?

Increase the monitoring time value. ( Page 90 Supplementary Cyclic Settings)

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom 139

14

When transient transmission cannot be performed The following lists the actions to be taken if transient transmission cannot be performed with the target station, and the engineering tool cannot perform monitoring.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the following tests to check for an error. Module communication test ( Page 108 Module communication test) Communication Test ( Page 43 Communication test)

When a station is disconnected from the network The following is the action to be taken when a station in data link is disconnected

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the following tests to check for an error. Module communication test ( Page 108 Module communication test) Cable test ( Page 133 Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used))

Check item Action Is the D LINK LED of the control or normal station turned off or flashing?

Perform troubleshooting for when the D LINK LED turns off or is flashing. ( Page 103 When the D LINK LED turns off or is flashing)

Is the baton pass status of the destination normal? In the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics, identify the cause of the error and take action. ( Page 111 Checking the Network Status)

Are the following control data of the dedicated instruction correct? CPU type of the target module Target network number Target station number

Correct the control data of the dedicated instruction.

Is the setting of the station number in the normal station correct?

Correct station numbers. ( Page 75 Station Number)

Is the network number duplicated on the network? Change the duplicated network number.

Is a communication path by the dynamic routing function is determined?

Power on the system and start transient transmission after a while. When "Dynamic Routing" under "Application Settings" of the station on the communication

path is set to "Disable", change it to "Enable".

Does the relay station to be passed support the dynamic routing function?

If the relay station to be passed does not support the dynamic routing function, set all the stations on the communication path in "Routing Setting" of "CPU Parameter".

Is the routing parameter for the sending source of transient transmission correct?

Correct the "Routing Setting" of "CPU Parameters". ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Have the routing parameters of the relay station correctly been set?

Correct the "Routing Setting" of "CPU Parameters". ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Are multiple link dedicated instructions with same channel setting executed simultaneously?

Set different channel to each instructions. Shift the execution timing of the link dedicated instructions.

Check item Action Is the ambient temperature for the module within the specified range?

Keep the ambient temperature within the specified range by taking action such as removing heat source.

0 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom

3

When a station is repeatedly disconnected and reconnected The following lists the actions to be taken when a station in data link is repeatedly disconnected and reconnected.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the following tests to check for an error. Module communication test ( Page 108 Module communication test) Cable test ( Page 133 Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used))

Common (when optical fiber cables and Ethernet cables are used) check item

Action

Does the communication cable used conform to the standard?

Replace the communication cable with one conforming to the standard. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Does the length of the communication cable meet the specifications?

Set the length of the communication cable within range. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC-Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Does the cabling condition (bending radius) meet the specifications?

Refer to the manual for the communication cable, and correct the bending radius.

Check item only when Ethernet cables are used Action Is any Ethernet cable disconnected? Replace the Ethernet cable.

Is the switching hub used operating normally? Check if a 1000BASE-T-compliant switching hub is used. ( MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet/CC- Link IE User's Manual (Startup))

Power off and on the switching hub.

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom 141

14

When communication is unstable The following lists the actions to be taken when link scan time or transmission delay time is long or when a transient transmission timeout occurred.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the following tests to check for an error. Module communication test ( Page 108 Module communication test) Cable test ( Page 133 Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used))

When IP communications cannot be performed using the IP packet transfer function Before troubleshooting the problem as listed below, perform the IP communication test and take actions according to the error code. ( Page 49 IP communication test) If the problem cannot be solved using the IP communication test, take actions listed below.

Common (when optical fiber cables and Ethernet cables are used) check item

Action

When Ethernet cables are used Is the L ER LED of the control or normal station on? When optical fiber cables are used Is the L ERR LED of the control or normal station on?

When Ethernet cables are used Perform troubleshooting for when the L ER LED turns on. ( Page 104 When the L ER LED turns on (when Ethernet cables are used)) When optical fiber cables are used Perform troubleshooting for when the L ERR LED turns on. ( Page 104 When the L ERR LED turns on (when optical fiber cables are used))

Is the ambient temperature for the module within the specified range? Keep the ambient temperature within the specified range by taking action such as removing heat source.

Check item only when Ethernet cables are used Action Is there any noise affecting the system? Check the wiring condition.

Check item Action Is the IP address of the connected Ethernet device correct?

Set an IP address meeting the IP address setting rules. ( Page 47 Rules for the IP address setting)

Is the IP address already in use? For the Ethernet device, set the IP address different from that of other devices on the network, such as an Ethernet-equipped module and CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

Disconnect the Ethernet device from the line and execute the Ping command to the IP address of the disconnected Ethernet device. If a response is received even though the device is disconnected, the IP address is already in use. Change the IP address.

Has a communication time over error occurred in the IP communication test?

When "Dynamic Routing" under "Application Settings" is set to "Disable", correct "Relay Station Network Number" in "Routing Setting" of the CPU parameters.

When "Dynamic Routing" under "Application Settings" is set to "Enable", check 'Communication path determination status' (Un\G12080 to Un\G12095) to check that the communication path to the destination station network number which is set in the third octet of the Ethernet device IP address is determined.

Have the routing parameters correctly been set? (Only when "Dynamic Routing" under "Application Settings" is set to "Disable")

Correct the "Routing Setting" of "CPU Parameters". When the first and second octets of the IP address are the same for the request source device, request

destination device, and modules between them, set the routing parameters so that the third octet of the IP address of the Ethernet device is used as "Target Station Network Number".

Is the network number of the Ethernet device side (the third octet of the IP address) the same as that of modules and another Ethernet device? (This applies only when the request source external device, request destination external device, and modules between them have the same first and second octets of the IP address.)

Change the network number of the Ethernet device side (the third octet of the IP address) to the one different from that of modules and another Ethernet device.

192.168.1.2 192.168.2.1192.168.3.30 192.168.2.30

192.168.1.1 192.168.1.3 192.168.3.1

Control station (station No.1)Normal station (station No.2) Normal station (station No.3)

Network No.1Network No.3 Network No.2

(Automatically assigned) (Automatically assigned)

CC-Link IE Controller Network

Change the network numbers to those not used for other stations.

IP address

Ethernet

2 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom

3

*1 When the device has been reconnected to the switching hub, or the switching hub has been replaced, it may take some time to read the MAC address. If so, retry communication from the Ethernet device again after a while or power on the switching hub again.

*2 A device on Ethernet has a table of IP addresses and their corresponding MAC address, called ARP cache. When a device on the line is replaced by the one having the same IP address, the MAC address in the ARP cache is different from that of the replaced device; therefore, communications may not be normally performed. The ARP cache is updated by resetting the device or after a while. The time varies depending on the device.

If the above actions do not solve the problem, perform the following tests to check for an error. Module communication test ( Page 108 Module communication test) Cable test ( Page 133 Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used))

Are settings configured in modules connected to the Ethernet device correct? First and second octets of the IP

address Subnet mask pattern Default router IP address

Check and correct the setting in the module connected to the Ethernet device.

Is the firewall or proxy server setting enabled on the Ethernet device?

Check and correct the settings on the Ethernet device. Is a response to the Ping command (ICMP echo request) enabled?

Is the antivirus software on the Ethernet device blocking the communication?

Check and correct the antivirus software settings on the Ethernet device. Is the security setting level of the antivirus software low? Is a response to the Ping command (ICMP echo request) enabled in the firewall settings?

When the Ethernet device has two or more Ethernet ports, have different default gateway settings been configured for each Ethernet port?

Set the same IP address in the default gateway of each Ethernet port. Set the communication route on the Ethernet device side using the route command so that communications

using the IP packet transfer function can be transmitted to the Ethernet device through the module connected to the Ethernet device. (This applies only to Ethernet devices that have the route command, such as Microsoft Windows.)

When the gateway setting is completed, execute the Ping command from the Ethernet device to check whether communications can be performed.

Is the switching hub used operating normally?

If an error has occurred in the switching hub, eliminate the error cause. If communications cannot be performed although no error has occurred in the switching hub, replace the

switching hub.*1

Has any device on the line, such as an Ethernet device, Ethernet-equipped module, and switching hub, been replaced? (This applies only when the device has been replaced by the one having the same IP address.)

Reset the device on the line.*2

Check item Action

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom 143

14

When redundant system function is used An error occurs in a CPU module When a redundant system is configured, if an error occurs in a CPU module, check the following items.

System switching cannot be performed When system switching cannot be performed by a system switching cause of CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules, check the following.

Cyclic data is turned off when system switching occurs. If cyclic data is turned off or momentarily turned off when system switching occurs, check whether the cyclic data communication range is included in the tracking target. ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Data link is not performed with the pairing-set normal station If data link is not performed with the pairing-set normal station, check whether the pairing-set normal station supports the redundant system function. ( Page 213 Added and Enhanced Functions)

Check item Action Is pairing set to the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules?

Set pairing in "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings". ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment)

Do the CC-Link IE Controller Network- equipped modules being used support the redundant system function?

Use CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules supporting the redundant system function. ( Page 213 Added and Enhanced Functions)

Check item Action Is the power supply module, CPU module, or redundant function module of the standby system operating normally?

Perform troubleshooting on the power supply module, CPU module, or redundant function module of the standby system. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

Is any cable for the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module of the standby system disconnected?

Check the wiring condition and put the network of the standby system in normal condition.

Is 'Flag for disabling system switching due to data link error' (SB0017) turned on?

Turn 'Flag for disabling system switching due to data link error' (SB0017) off.

4 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.4 Troubleshooting by Symptom

3

3.5 List of Error Codes This section lists the error codes, error details and causes, and action for the errors occur in the processings for data communication between CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and external devices or caused by processing requests from the CPU module on the own station. Error codes are classified into major error, moderate error, and minor error, and can be checked in the "Error Information" tab in the "Module Diagnostics" window. ( Page 106 Error information)

Error code Error details and causes Action Detailed information

1080H The number of writes to the flash ROM has exceeded 100000.

Replace the module.

1800H A connection failure was detected in the network.

Correct the wiring status.

1811H An error was detected in the CPU module.

Check the error of the CPU module and take action using the module diagnostics of the engineering tool.

1830H Number of reception requests of transient transmission (link dedicated instruction) exceeded upper limit of simultaneously processable requests.

Lower the transient transmission usage frequency, and then perform again.

1845H Too many processings of transient transmission (link dedicated instruction) and cannot perform transient transmission.

Correct the transient transmission execution count.

1860H Baton pass stops with an error of communication line or CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

20E0H The module cannot communicate with the CPU module.

The hardware failure of the CPU module may have been occurred. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

2220H The parameter is set for extending the link points extended setting, however the CPU module and network modules do not support the link points extended setting.

When the link points extended setting is used, use a CPU module and network modules with the firmware version supported the link points extended setting.

When the link points extended setting is not used, set "Not to Extend" of "Link points extended setting" on "Application Settings".

Parameter information Parameter type

The parameter setting is corrupted. Check the detailed information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool, and write the displayed parameter. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

2221H The network number set on the own station is different from one on the control station

Set the same network number as the own station and the control station. Parameter information Parameter type I/O No. Parameter No. Network No. Station No.

The own station is set to extended mode, however, the control station is set to normal mode. Or, the own station is set to normal mode and the control station is set to extended mode.

Set the same mode as the own station and the control station.

The own station is set to "Extend" of "Link points extended setting" in "Application Settings", however, the control station is set to "Not to Extend". Or, the own station is set to "Not to Extend" and the control station is set to "Extend".

Set the same setting of "Link points extended setting" in "Application Settings" to the own station and the control station.

The set value is out of the range. Check the detailed information of the error by executing module diagnostics using the engineering tool, and correct the parameter setting corresponding to the displayed number.

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.5 List of Error Codes 145

14

24C0H to 24C3H

An error was detected on the system bus.

Take measures to reduce noise. Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the error occurs again even

after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module, base unit, or extension cable. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

System configuration information I/O No. Base No. Slot No. CPU No.

24C6H An error was detected on the system bus.

Take measures to reduce noise. Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the error occurs again even

after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module, base unit, or extension cable. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

3001H A station with the same station number was found in the same network.

Multiple control stations were detected in the same network.

Correct the station number or station type of the station where the error was detected. After taking the above actions, power off and on or reset all stations where the error was detected.

Parameter information Parameter type I/O No. Parameter No. Parameter item

No.

3006H Pairing is not set to the stations in a redundant system.

Check the pairing setting in "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings" of the control station.

Parameter information Parameter type I/O No. Parameter No. Network No. Station No.

3007H Pairing is set to the stations not included in a redundant system.

Check the pairing setting in "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings" of the control station.

Parameter information Parameter type I/O No. Parameter No. Network No. Station No.

3008H "RJ71GP21-SX" or "RJ71GP21S- SX" is selected for the module name in a redundant system.

When using the module in a redundant system, select "RJ71GP21-SX (R)" or "RJ71GP21S-SX (R)" for the module name in the "Add New Module" window.

Parameter information Parameter type I/O No. Parameter No. Network No. Station No.

"RJ71GP21-SX (R)" or "RJ71GP21S-SX (R)" is selected for the module name in a system other than a redundant system.

When using the module in a system other than a redundant system, select "RJ71GP21-SX" or "RJ71GP21S-SX" for the module name in the "Add New Module" window.

3040H Response data of the dedicated instruction cannot be created.

Increase the request interval. Decrease the number of request nodes. Wait for a response to the previous request before sending the next

request. Correct the timeout value.

3C00H to 3C03H

A hardware failure has been detected. Take measures to reduce noise. Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the error occurs again even

after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module, base unit, or extension cable. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

3C0FH A hardware failure has been detected. Take measures to reduce noise. Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the error occurs again even

after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module, base unit, or extension cable. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

3C10H A hardware failure has been detected. Take measures to reduce noise. Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the error occurs again even

after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module, base unit, or extension cable. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

A function which is not supported was used. (When Ethernet cables are used)

Check that firmware version of the RJ71EN71 supports the function to be used.

Error code Error details and causes Action Detailed information

6 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.5 List of Error Codes

3

3C11H A hardware failure has been detected. Take measures to reduce noise. Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the error occurs again even

after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the module, base unit, or extension cable. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

3C14H A hardware failure has been detected. Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module or CPU module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

3C2FH An error was detected in the memory. Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

3E00H An error was detected in the network module.

Reset the CPU module, and run it again. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

3E01H Network type of the own station is unexpected setting.

Rewrite the module parameter using the engineering tool. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, the possible cause is a hardware failure of the error module. Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

4000H to 4FFFH

Errors detected by the CPU module ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

E006H The receive queue is full. Pause the transient transmission temporarily, and retry the operation. Lower the transient transmission usage frequency, and then perform

again. Use the COM instruction to increase the frequency of transient

transmission. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E102H The own station is set as a reserved station.

Cancel the reserved station setting in "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings" of the control station. Or change the own station number to the one that is not specified as a reserved station.

E103H The own station number set is out of the range of total stations.

Increase the number of total stations in "Network Range Assignment" of "Required Settings" of the control station. Or change the own station number to the one that is within the number of total stations.

E120H The UINI instruction was executed at the control station.

The station number of the control station cannot be set by the UINI instruction. Set it in "Station No." of "Required Settings".

E121H The UINI instruction was executed when "Parameter Editor" is selected for "Setting Method" under "Station Number" of "Required Settings".

Execute again after setting "Setting Method" under "Station Number" in "Required Settings" of the normal station to "Program".

The UINI instruction was executed in a redundant system.

The station number cannot be set by the UINI instruction in a redundant system.

E122H The station number set for the own station by the UINI instruction is already used for the other station.

Execute again after changing the own station number setting in the control data.

Execute again after changing the station number of other station which is duplicated.

E123H After setting a station number with the UINI instruction, the instruction was executed again.

Station number setting with the UINI instruction is limited to one time only. Execute again after resetting the CPU module.

E160H 'Link startup/stop direction' (SW0000) is not set properly.

Check the setting and stop or restart cyclic transmission.

E162H Re-execution was attempted during the processing of cyclic transmission stop/ restart.

Retry the operation after the stop or restart of cyclic transmission is completed.

E163H Re-execution was attempted during the processing of cyclic transmission stop/ restart.

Retry the operation after the stop or restart of cyclic transmission is completed.

E164H Re-execution was attempted during the processing of cyclic transmission stop/ restart.

Retry the operation after the stop or restart of cyclic transmission is completed.

E165H 'Link startup/stop station specification' (SW0001 to SW0008) is not set properly.

Check the setting and stop or restart cyclic transmission.

Error code Error details and causes Action Detailed information

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.5 List of Error Codes 147

14

E166H 'Link startup/stop group specification' (SW0012 to SW0013) is not set properly.

Check the setting and stop or restart cyclic transmission.

E170H to E172H

An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E173H During execution of the communication test, the test was retried.

After completion of the communication test, retry the operation.

E174H The maximum number of transmission completion signal retries was reached.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool, and retry the operation.

Check if "Routing Setting" in "CPU Parameter" is correctly set.

E175H No response has been returned within the communication monitoring time.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool, and retry the operation.

Check if "Routing Setting" in "CPU Parameter" is correctly set.

E176H Timeout has occurred without transmission completion.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool, and retry the operation.

Check if "Routing Setting" in "CPU Parameter" is correctly set.

E177H to E179H

An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E17AH The response data have been received two times or more.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool, and retry the operation.

E17BH An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E17CH The target station specified for the communication test is incorrect.

Correct "Target Station" of communication test, and retry the operation. The own station, relay sending station, and the station which is mounted

on the same base unit (main base unit and extension base unit) cannot be specified as the communication test target.

E17DH The IP address of the own station cannot be obtained when an IP communication test is performed.

Check the destination IP address of the IP communication test.

E17EH The same numbers are not used for the first and second octets of the IP addresses set in the IP communication test destination setting in the network of the request source device, request destination device, and modules between them.

Check the destination IP address of the IP communication test.

E17FH An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E180H During execution of the cable test, the test was retried. (only when Ethernet cables are used)

After completion of the cable test, retry the operation.

E181H The IP packet transfer function is not supported.

The transfer destination of the IP data does not support the IP packet transfer function.

E182H During execution of the IP communication test, the test was retried.

Retry the operation after a while.

E183H Transient transmission failed. Lower the transient transmission usage frequency, and then perform again.

Check if the switching hub is connected properly. (only when Ethernet cables are used)

Check if the cables are connected properly.

E184H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E185H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E186H The IP address of the standby system is set for "Connected Station (Host)" or "Communication Destination Setting" for the IP communication test.

Check the IP address set for "Connected Station (Host)" or "Communication Destination Setting" for the IP communication test.

E201H The same transient data have been received two times or more.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool. Although the error occurs, the second or later received transient data is discarded in the module.

Error code Error details and causes Action Detailed information

8 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.5 List of Error Codes

3

E203H The send buffer is full. Pause the transient transmission temporarily, and retry the operation. Lower the transient transmission usage frequency, and then perform

again. Use the COM instruction to increase the frequency of transient

transmission. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E204H The specified number of resends has been reached.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool.

E205H The receive buffer is full. Pause the transient transmission temporarily, and retry the operation. Lower the transient transmission usage frequency, and then perform

again. Use the COM instruction to increase the frequency of transient

transmission. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E206H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E207H Although the target station of transient transmission is connected in the same network, different network number is set.

Correct "Network No." in "Required Settings". When the parameter is not set, network number is set to 1 (default). Correct the network number of the other station.

E208H The target station number specified for transient send/receive is out of range.

Correct the target station number at the own station, and retry the operation.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E20BH In transient transmission, the number of relay to other networks exceeded seven.

Change the system configuration so that the number of relay stations may be seven or less.

Check if "Routing Setting" in "CPU Parameter" is correctly set.

E20AH An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E20FH The target station number is set to zero in transient transmission using protocols such as SLMP.

Correct the target station number at the own station, and retry the operation.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E211H When there was no control station, "Specified Control Station" was specified for transient transmission using protocols such as SLMP.

Correct the target station number at the own station, and retry the operation.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E212H When there was no control station, "Present Control Station" was specified for transient transmission using protocols such as SLMP.

Correct the target station number at the own station, and retry the operation.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E213H In transient transmission, timeout has occurred without transmission completion.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E215H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E216H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E218H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E21BH Transient transmission was performed when the station number of the own station has not been set yet.

Specify the station number using the UINI instruction, and retry the operation.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E21CH An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E21EH An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E21FH An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

Error code Error details and causes Action Detailed information

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.5 List of Error Codes 149

15

E221H to E223H

An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E224H Attribute code set in the CC-Link transient request frame is out of range.

Execute the RIRD/RIWT instruction again after correcting the attribute code in the control data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E225H Access code set in the CC-Link transient request frame is out of range.

Execute the RIRD/RIWT instruction again after correcting the access code in the control data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E226H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E228H The request command of transient transmission is incorrect.

The CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics was used for the network to which the relay receiving station belongs.

Correct the request command at the request source, and retry the operation.

Review the connection destination so that the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics is used for the network to which the relay sending station belongs.

E229H The control station does not exist. Add the control station to the network.

E22AH A transient transmission error was detected.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool, and take action.

Check if the switching hub and the cables are connected properly. If the request source is on another network, check if the routing

parameters are set correctly, and take action. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E22BH Baton pass has not been performed. Check the communication status.

E22CH A transient transmission error was detected.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool, and take action.

Check if the switching hub and the cables are connected properly. If the request source is on another network, check if the routing

parameters are set correctly, and take action. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E22DH A transient transmission error was detected.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool, and take action.

Check if the switching hub and the cables are connected properly. If the request source is on another network, check if the routing

parameters are set correctly, and take action. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E236H The TTL of the IP data is incorrect. Correct the TTL at the IP request source and retry the operation.

E237H The IP address setting is not correctly set.

Correct the IP address of the control station.

E241H to E245H

The hardware of the target network module for dedicated instruction has failed.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E24FH When the dedicated instruction is executed, the target station number setting is not correct.

Execute again after correcting the target station number in the control data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E251H Transient data for the same dedicated instruction have been received two times or more.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool.

E254H The target station's CPU type specified for the dedicated instruction is out of range.

Execute again after correcting the target station's CPU type in the control data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E255H The data size specified for the dedicated instruction is out of range.

Execute again after correcting the data length in the control data. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

Error code Error details and causes Action Detailed information

0 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.5 List of Error Codes

3

E256H The arrival monitoring time specified for the dedicated instruction is out of range.

Execute again after correcting the arrival monitoring time in the control data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E257H The number of resends specified for the dedicated instruction is out of range.

Execute again after correcting the number of resends in the control data. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E258H The network number specified for the dedicated instruction is out of range.

Execute again after correcting the target station No. in the control data. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E259H The channel used in the dedicated instruction is incorrect.

Set 1 to 8 for the target channel number in the control data when executing the SEND instruction.

Execute again after correcting the number of the channel used by own station in the control data.

E25AH The modification specification specified for the UINI instruction is out of range.

Execute again after correcting the modification specification in the control data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E25BH The own station No. specified for the dedicated instruction is out of range.

Execute again after correcting the own station number in the control data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E262H When the target station specified for the dedicated instruction is "Group" or "All stations", "With arrival confirmation" is specified for execution type. For the REQ instruction, the specified request type is incorrect.

Execute again after changing the execution type in the control data to "No arrival confirmation".

For the REQ instruction, execute again after correcting request type. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E264H Transmission did not completed after execution of the dedicated instruction, and timeout has occurred.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E265H No response was received after execution of the dedicated instruction, and timeout has occurred.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool.

When the dynamic routing function is used, check the buffer memory area of Communication path determination status and check if communication to the target network number is possible.

For the RECV instruction, execute again after correcting the channels used by own station in the control data.

For the RECV instruction, check that 'RECV execution request flag CH1' (SB0030) to 'RECV execution request flag CH8' (SB0037) are on.

Execute the transient transmission again after the dedicated instruction completed with an error.

If the request destination is on another network, check if the CPU module of the relay station supports the routing setting, and take an action.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E266H The SEND instruction was received from other network.

Change the target station at the station that executed the SEND instruction.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E267H The own station number was set as the target station number.

Execute again after correcting the target station number in the control data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E268H In the execution/abnormal completion type specification, the bit in the area fixed to 0 is turned on.

Execute again after correcting the execution/abnormal completion type in the control data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E269H The request type or sub-request type specified in the REQ instruction is incorrect.

Execute again after correcting the request or sub-request type in the request data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

Error code Error details and causes Action Detailed information

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.5 List of Error Codes 151

15

E26AH When there was no control station on the network, the dedicated instruction was executed specifying the specified control station or current control station.

Execute again after correcting the target station number in the control data.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E26CH The channel specified is being used for another instruction.

Retry the operation after a while. Change the channels used by own station or the target station's channel

in the control data.

E26DH The channel specified is being used for event parameters.

Execute again after correcting the channel used by own station in the control data.

Execute again after correcting the channel used in "Interrupt Settings" of "Application Setting".

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E26EH The device range specified for the ZNRD/ZNWR instruction is not correct.

Execute again after correcting the setting data for the ZNRD/ZNWR instruction.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E26FH The device range specified for the ZNRD/ZNWR instruction is not correct.

Execute again after correcting the setting data for the ZNRD/ZNWR instruction.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E271H The operation mode specified in the REQ instruction (remote RUN/STOP) is incorrect.

Execute again after correcting the operation mode in the setting data. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E272H When the remote RUN is specified in the REQ instruction (remote RUN/ STOP), the specified clear mode is not correct.

Execute again after correcting the clear mode in the setting data. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E273H The control data specified for the RRUN instruction is not correct.

Execute again after correcting the mode in the setting data. If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your

local Mitsubishi representative.

E274H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E277H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E278H The request data size of transient transmission is out of range.

Correct the request command at the request source, and retry the operation.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E279H The routing setting is not correctly set. Correct the network number at the request source, and retry the operation.

If the request source is on another network, check if the routing parameters are correctly set.

E27AH Dedicated instructions which cannot be executed simultaneously were executed.

Other dedicated instructions are in execution. Execute again after a while.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E27BH The target station type specification of the dedicated instruction is incorrect.

Execute again after correcting the station type of the target station at the request source.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E27CH An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E27DH An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E286H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E2A0H The receive buffer for the CC-Link dedicated instruction is full.

Too many transient requests have been received from CC-Link IE Controller Network devices. Adjust the timing of transient requests from CC-Link IE Controller Network devices so that each request will issued at certain intervals.

Error code Error details and causes Action Detailed information

2 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.5 List of Error Codes

3

E2A1H The send buffer for the CC-Link dedicated instruction is full.

Too many transient requests have been received from CC-Link IE Controller Network devices. Adjust the timing of transient requests from CC-Link IE Controller Network devices so that each request will issued at certain intervals.

E2A2H The hardware of the network module has failed.

Check the network status using the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the engineering tool.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E2A3H The frame length (L) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2A4H The gate count (GCNT) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2A5H The destination station number (DA) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2A6H The source station number (SA) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2A7H The destination application type (DAT) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2A8H The source application type (SAT) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2A9H The destination network number (DNA) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2AAH The destination station number (DS) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2ABH The source network number (SNA) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2ACH The source station number (SS) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2ADH The data length (L1) in the transient transmission frame is incorrect.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2AEH The destination station number (DA) in the transient transmission frame of the received data matches the own station, but the destination network number (DNA) or the destination station number (DS) does not match the own station.

An invalid transient frame was received from a CC-Link IE Controller Network device. Correct the contents of the transient frame on the external device side. For details, please consult the manufacturer of the CC-Link IE Controller Network device.

E2AFH The own station number was set as the target station number of the CC-Link dedicated instruction.

Check that the target station in the send data is not the own station.

E2B0H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

Error code Error details and causes Action Detailed information

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.5 List of Error Codes 153

15

E501H to E503H

An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E504H Transient transmission (dedicated instruction, engineering tool connection) was executed while the own station did not perform baton pass.

Execute the dedicated instruction interlocking with 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) and 'Baton pass status of each station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7).

Check the 'Cause of baton pass interruption' (SW0048) at the own station and restart baton pass before executing the transient transmission.

Execute the transient transmission again after the dedicated instruction completed with an error.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E505H Transient transmission (dedicated instruction, engineering tool connection) was executed with the own station number duplicated.

Remove the duplication of the own station numbers before executing the transient transmission.

E521H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E5F0H Transient transmission (dedicated instruction, engineering tool connection) was executed while the target station did not perform baton pass.

Return the target station. Execute the dedicated instruction interlocking with 'Baton pass error

status of own station' (SB0047) and 'Baton pass status of each station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7).

Check the 'Cause of baton pass interruption' (SW0048) at the target station and restart baton pass before executing the transient transmission.

If the error occurs again even after taking the above, please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

E5F1H The target station number of transient transmission is already in use.

Change the target station number.

E5F8H There is a station that does not support the IP packet transfer function on the communication path when the IP packet transfer function is used.

Check the station on the communication path, and check whether the module in the station supports the IP packet transfer function.

E840H Number of transient request exceeded the upper limit of simultaneously processable requests.

Pause the transient transmission temporarily, and retry the operation. Lower the transient transmission usage frequency, and then perform

again.

E841H The request data size of memory read/ write command is out of range.

Correct the read or write size specification at the transient request source, and retry the operation.

E842H Routing information to the destination network number is not registered.

In transient transmission, the number of relay to other networks exceeded seven.

Correct the target network number at the request source, and retry the operation.

Correct the communication path from the transient request source to the destination, and retry the operation.

When the dynamic routing is not used, or the module of the series other than MELSEC iQ-R is included, retry the operation after correcting the routing setting.

Change the system configuration so that the number of relay stations may be seven or less.

E843H The module operation mode is set to a mode in which transient transmission cannot be executed.

After completion of the module communication test, retry the operation.

E844H Incorrect frame is received. Unsupported pre-conversion protocol Unsupported frame type Application header variable part Application header HDS Application header RTP Read command not requiring

response

Correct the request data at the transient request source, and retry the operation.

EA00H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

EA01H An error was detected in the network module.

Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative.

Error code Error details and causes Action Detailed information

4 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.5 List of Error Codes

3

3.6 List of Parameter Numbers This section lists the parameter numbers displayed in the module diagnostics.

Item Parameter No. Required Settings Station Type 7100H

Network Number 7100H

Station Number 7100H

Network Range Assignment Total No. of Stations A060H

LB/LW Setting (1) A061H

LB/LW Setting (2) A062H

LX/LY Setting (1) A063H

LX/LY Setting (2) A064H

I/O Master Station A063H A064H

Reserved Station A001H

Pairing A003H

Shared Group A000H

Basic Settings Refresh Setting 7401H

Network Topology A060H

Application Settings Supplementary Cyclic Settings A060H

Link points extended setting A071H

Interrupt Settings A014H A015H

Transient Transmission Group No. A010H

Dynamic Routing A050H

IP Address A012H

Parameter Name 7310H

Event Reception from Other Stations A016H

Module Operation Mode 7100H

Interlink Transmission Settings 7500H

Redundant System Settings 7110H

3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.6 List of Parameter Numbers 155

15

3.7 Event List This section lists the events which occur in CC-Link IE Controller Network.

Event code

Event type

Overview Cause

00100 System Link-up Link-up has occurred when the network cable connected to the external device was connected.

00130 Receive frame error Receive frame error was detected.

00500 < > Baton pass return Baton pass of the own station was returned from interruption status to normal status.

00501 < > Baton pass return Baton pass of another station was returned from interruption status to normal status.

00502 All stations baton pass normalization Baton pass was returned to normal status at all stations.

00510 < > Data link restart Data link of the own station was restarted.

00511 < > Data link restart Data link of another station was restarted.

00512 All stations data link normalization Data link was returned to normal status at all stations.

00513 < > Data link start instruction acceptance

Data link startup of the own station instruction was received.

00514 < > Data link stop instruction acceptance

Data link stop instruction of the own station was received.

00540 Loopback resolution Loopback execution status was resolved when using a ring topology (using the loopback function).

00541 Receive parameter error resolution A parameter error received from control station was resolved. (Normal parameter was received.)

00700 Power applied from the external power supply

The power applied from the external power supply was detected.

00800 Link-down Link-down occurred when network cable connected to the external device was disconnected.

00A00 System switching request issued A system switching request occurred.

00C00 < > Baton pass interruption Baton pass of the own station was interrupted.

00C01 < > Baton pass interruption

Baton pass of another station was interrupted.

00C02 Response error from/to another station Abnormal response was returned from another station when accessing another station.

Abnormal response was returned to another station when accessed from another station.

00C10 < > Data link stop Data link of the own station was stopped.

00C11 < > Data link stop Data link of another station was stopped.

00C20 < > Parameter error occurrence

A parameter error has occurred in another station.

00C21 < > CPU error occurrence

An error has occurred in the CPU module on another station.

00C23 Loopback occurrence Path switching has occurred when using a ring topology (using the loopback function).

00C24 < > Receive frame error occurrence

A receive frame error has occurred at another station.

00C25 Receive parameter error occurrence A parameter error received from the control station has been detected.

00F00 Interrupt of power from the external power supply

Interrupt of power from the external power supply was detected.

24000 Operation Data link startup instruction Data link startup to the own station or another station was instructed.

24001 Data link stop instruction Data link stop to the own station or another station was instructed.

24031 Network number, station number setting/ change execution

Setting or change of the network number or station number of the own station was executed.

24100 < > Parameter change/new parameter acceptance

Parameter was changed. Or new parameter was received at power-on.

24F00 < > CPU operating status change detection

Operating status of the programmable controller CPU on another station was changed.

6 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 3.7 Event List

APPX Appendix 1 Module Label 157

A

APPENDICES Appendix 1 Module Label The link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module can be set using module label.

Structure of the module label The module label name is defined with the following structure. "Instance name"_"Module number"."Label name" "Instance name"_"Module number"."Label name"_D

Ex.

GP21_1.bDetect_DataLinkError

Instance name The following is the instance name of the RJ71GP21(S)-SX.

For the instance name of the RJ71EN71 and RnENCPU when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Ethernet User's Manual (Application)

Module number A sequential number starting with "1" for identifying a module from the one with the same instance name.

Label name A label name unique to the module.

_D This symbol indicates that the module label is for direct access. The label without "_D" is for link refresh. The following are the differences between link refresh and direct access.

When multiple CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules of the same network number are mounted and the module labels of link special relay (SB) and link special register (SW) is used for direct access, the access target is the module which has the smallest slot number.

Model Instance name RJ71GP21-SX GP21

RJ71GP21S-SX GP21

Type Description Access timing Link refresh The values read/written from/to the module labels are reflected to the module at link refresh. The

execution time of the program can be shortened. At link refresh

Direct access The values read/written from/to the module labels are reflected to the module immediately. Although the execution time of the program is longer than the one at the link refresh, the responsiveness is improved. For the instruction processing time, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (CPU Module Instructions, Standard Functions/Function Blocks)

At writing to or reading from the module label

158 APPX Appendix 2 I/O Signals

Appendix 2 I/O Signals This section describes the I/O signals for the CPU module when Ethernet cables are used. The I/O signal assignment of when the start I/O number of the RJ71EN71 and RnENCPU (when the CC-Link IE Controller Network function is used) is "0" is listed below. When optical fiber cables are used, the I/O signals cannot be used.

List of I/O signals The following table lists I/O signals. The device X is an input signal from the RJ71EN71 or the RnENCPU (network part) to the CPU module. The device Y is an input signal from the CPU module to the RJ71EN71 or the RnENCPU (network part).

Input signals

Output signals

Do not use (turn on) any "use prohibited" signals as an input or output signal to the CPU module. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.

Details of I/O signals

Module ready (XF) This signal is used to check the status of module operation preparation. Off: Not available for module operation On: Available for module operation

Device No. Signal name X0 to XE Use prohibited

XF Module ready

X10 to X1F Use prohibited

Device No. Signal name Y0 to Y1F Use prohibited

A

Appendix 3 Buffer Memory The buffer memory is used to exchange data between the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and the CPU module. Buffer memory values are defaulted when the CPU module is reset or the system is powered off.

For the RJ71EN71 and RnENCPU, add the following value to the buffer memory addresses when setting "Port 1 Network Type" to "Ethernet" and "Port 2 Network Type" to "CC-Link IE Control". Address (decimal): 2000000 Address (hexadecimal): 1E8480H

List of buffer memory addresses Address (decimal)

Address (hexadecimal)

Name Initial value

Read, write

0 to 2591 0H to A1FH System area

2592 A20H Transient transmission error log information area

Transient transmission error count 0 Read

2593 A21H Error log pointer

2594 A22H Error log block 1 Error code

2595 A23H System area

2596 A24H Target station network No. 0 Read

2597 A25H Target station number

2598 A26H Own station's network No.

2599 A27H Own station's station No.

2600 to 2603 A28H to A2BH Time of error occurrence

2604 to 2613 A2CH to A35H Error log block 2 Same as in Error log block 1

2614 to 2623 A36H to A3FH Error log block 3 Same as in Error log block 1

2624 to 2633 A40H to A49H Error log block 4 Same as in Error log block 1

2634 to 2643 A4AH to A53H Error log block 5 Same as in Error log block 1

2644 to 2653 A54H to A5DH Error log block 6 Same as in Error log block 1

2654 to 2663 A5EH to A67H Error log block 7 Same as in Error log block 1

2664 to 2673 A68H to A71H Error log block 8 Same as in Error log block 1

2674 to 2683 A72H to A7BH Error log block 9 Same as in Error log block 1

2684 to 2693 A7CH to A85H Error log block 10 Same as in Error log block 1

2694 to 2703 A86H to A8FH Error log block 11 Same as in Error log block 1

2704 to 2713 A90H to A99H Error log block 12 Same as in Error log block 1

2714 to 2723 A9AH to AA3H Error log block 13 Same as in Error log block 1

2724 to 2733 AA4H to AADH Error log block 14 Same as in Error log block 1

2734 to 2743 AAEH to AB7H Error log block 15 Same as in Error log block 1

2744 to 2753 AB8H to AC1H Error log block 16 Same as in Error log block 1

2754 to 2783 AC2H to ADFH System area

APPX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 159

16

2784 AE0H Transmission path switching history (only when optical fiber cables are used)

Transmission path switching count 0 Read

2785 AE1H Transmission path switching history pointer

2786 AE2H History 1 Post-switching status

2787 AE3H Number of connected modules

2788 AE4H IN-side loopback station No.

2789 AE5H OUT-side loopback station No.

2790 to 2791 AE6H to AE7H System area

2792 to 2795 AE8H to AEBH Time of occurrence 0 Read

2796 to 2805 AECH to AF5H History 2 Same as in History 1

2806 to 2815 AF6H to AFFH History 3 Same as in History 1

2816 to 2825 B00H to B09H History 4 Same as in History 1

2826 to 2835 B0AH to B13H History 5 Same as in History 1

2836 to 2845 B14H to B1DH History 6 Same as in History 1

2846 to 2855 B1EH to B27H History 7 Same as in History 1

2856 to 2865 B28H to B31H History 8 Same as in History 1

2866 to 2875 B32H to B3BH History 9 Same as in History 1

2876 to 2885 B3CH to B45H History 10 Same as in History 1

2886 to 2895 B46H to B4FH History 11 Same as in History 1

2896 to 2905 B50H to B59H History 12 Same as in History 1

2906 to 2915 B5AH to B63H History 13 Same as in History 1

2916 to 2925 B64H to B6DH History 14 Same as in History 1

2926 to 2935 B6EH to B77H History 15 Same as in History 1

2936 to 2945 B78H to B81H History 16 Same as in History 1

2946 to 8191 B82H to 1FFFH System area

Address (decimal)

Address (hexadecimal)

Name Initial value

Read, write

0 APPX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory

A

Do not write data to "System area". Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.

If the value in an area of one word in size becomes equal to or higher than 65536, the count stops at 65535 (FFFFH).

8192 2000H System configuration information

Own station (network card) information

Manufacturer code 0 Read

8193 2001H Model type

8194 2002H Model code

8195 2003H Version

8196 to 8199 2004H to 2007H System area

8200 2008H Own station (controller) information

Controller information valid/ invalid flag

0 Read, write

8201 2009H Manufacturer code

8202 200AH Model type

8203 200BH Model code

8204 200CH Version

8205 to 8214 200DH to 2016H Model name string

8215 to 8216 2017H to 2018H Vendor-specific device information

8217 to 8223 2019H ~201FH System area

8224 2020H Other station (station No.1) (network card) information

Manufacturer code 0 Read

8225 2021H Model type

8226 2022H Model code

8227 2023H Version

8228 to 8231 2024H to 2027H System area

8232 2028H Other station (station No.1) (controller) information

Controller information valid/ invalid flag

0 Read

8233 2029H Manufacturer code

8234 202AH Model type

8235 202BH Model code

8236 202CH Version

8237 to 8246 202DH to 2036H Model name string

8247 to 8248 2037H to 2038H Vendor-specific device information

8249 to 8255 2039H to 203FH System area

8256 to 12063 2040H to 2F1FH Other station information (station No.2 to 120)

Same as Other station information (station No.1)

12064 to 12079 2F20H to 2F2FH System area

12080 2F30H Communication path determination status

Communication path determination status (network No.1 to 16)

0 Read

12081 to 12095 2F31H to 2F3FH Communication path determination status (network No.17 to 239)

12096 to 65535 2F40H to FFFFH System area

Address (decimal)

Address (hexadecimal)

Name Initial value

Read, write

APPX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 161

16

Details of buffer memory addresses

Transient transmission error log Transient transmission error count (Un\G2592) The cumulative number of errors saved in the error log blocks is stored.

Error log pointer (Un\G2593) The error log block number of the latest error log is stored. 0: No error (No error log data) 1 or more: Error log block number of the latest error log

Ex.

When the pointer value is "16", the latest error log is registered to Error log block 16. The 17th and subsequent errors will be registered to the error log from Error log block 1 again.

Error log blocks 1 to 16 (Un\G2594 to Un\G2753) Transient transmission error logs are stored. Error log blocks 1 to 16 are composed of data in the same arrangement. Error code: An error code is stored. ( Page 145 List of Error Codes) Target station network No./Target station No.: Network number and station number of an error-detected station are stored. Own station's network No./Own station's station No.: Network number and station number of the own station are stored. Time of error occurrence: Time of transient transmission error is stored as a BCD code.

*1 Indicates the time of error occurrence.

Transient transmission error logs can be cleared by the following. Turning on 'Clear transient transmission error count' (SB000A). ( Page 166 List of Link Special Relay

(SB) Areas) Powering off and on the system or resetting the CPU module. If a transient transmission error is detected at start of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module, the time of error occurrence may be left blank.

Name Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Error log block 1 Un\G2594 Error code

Un\G2595 System area

Un\G2596 Target station network No.

Un\G2597 Target station number

Un\G2598 Own station's network No.

Un\G2599 Own station's station No.

Un\G2600*1 Month (01H to 12H) Year (00H to 99H), last 2 digits

Un\G2601*1 Hour (00H to 23H) Day (01H to 31H)

Un\G2602*1 Second (00H to 59H) Minute (00H to 59H)

Un\G2603*1 Year (00H to 99H), first 2 digits Day of week (0H: Sunday to 6H: Saturday)

Error log blocks 2 to 16 Un\G2604 to Un\G2753

Information on Error log blocks 2 to 16 is stored in the same order as Error log block 1.

2 APPX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory

A

Transmission path switching history (only when optical fiber cables are used) The transmission path switching history data are cleared at the time the module is first placed in the loop status after power- on.

Transmission path switching count (Un\G2784) The cumulative number of transmission path switching saved in the transmission path switching history is stored.

Transmission path switching history pointer (Un\G2785) History number of the latest history is stored. 0: No history (No history data) 1 or more: History number of the latest history

Ex.

When the pointer value is "16", the latest history is registered to History 16. The 17th and subsequent switching will be registered to the histories from History 1 again.

Histories 1 to 16 (Un\G2786 to Un\G2945) Transmission path switching history data are stored. Histories 1 to 16 are composed of data in the same arrangement. Post-switching status: The loop status after transmission path switching is stored. (0: Normal, 1: Loopback, 2: Error on all

the stations) Number of connected modules: The number of modules connected to the network is stored. IN-side loopback station No.: Station number of the station where a loopback has occurred on its IN-side is stored. OUT-side loopback station No.: Station number of the station where a loopback has occurred on its OUT-side is stored. Time of occurrence: Time of transmission path switching is stored as a BCD code.

*1 Indicates the transmission path switching occurrence time.

Transmission path switching history can be cleared by the following. Turning on 'Clear loop switching count' (SB0009). ( Page 166 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas) Powering off and on the system or resetting the CPU module.

Name Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 History 1 Un\G2786 Post-switching status

Un\G2787 Number of connected modules

Un\G2788 IN-side loopback station No.

Un\G2789 OUT-side loopback station No.

Un\G2790 to Un\G2791 System area

Un\G2792*1 Month (01H to 12H) Year (00H to 99H), last 2 digits

Un\G2793*1 Hour (00H to 23H) Day (01H to 31H)

Un\G2794*1 Second (00H to 59H) Minute (00H to 59H)

Un\G2795*1 Year (00H to 99H), first 2 digits Day of week (0H: Sunday to 6H: Saturday)

Histories 2 to 16

Un\G2796 to Un\G2945 Information on Histories 2 to 16 is stored in the same order as History 1.

APPX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 163

16

System configuration information The information of the own station and other stations on the network is stored. The other station information areas can be used in a control station only.

Own station (network card) information (Un\G8192 to Un\G8195)

Own station (controller) information (Un\G8200 to Un\G8216)

Other station (network card) information (station No.1) (Un\G8224 to Un\G8231)

Other station (controller) information (station No.1) (Un\G8232 to Un\G8255)

Other station information (station No.2 to 120) (Un\G8256 to Un\G12063) The information on station number 2 to station number 120 is stored in the same order as Other station (network card) information (station No.1) and Other station (controller) information (station No.1).

Address Name Description Un\G8192 Manufacturer code The information on the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module of the own

station is stored.Un\G8193 Model type

Un\G8194 Model code

Un\G8195 Version

Address Name Description Un\G8200 Controller information valid/invalid

flag Whether the value stored in the own station (controller) information is valid or invalid is stored. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

Un\G8201 Manufacturer code The information on the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module of the own station is stored.Un\G8202 Model type

Un\G8203 Model code

Un\G8204 Version

Un\G8205 to Un\G8214 Model name string

Un\G8215 to Un\G8216 Vendor-specific device information

Address Name Description Un\G8224 Manufacturer code The information of the other station (station No.1) is stored.

Un\G8225 Model type

Un\G8226 Model code

Un\G8227 Version

Un\G8228 to Un\G8231 System area

Address Name Description Un\G8232 Controller information valid/invalid

flag Whether the value stored in Other station (controller) information (station No.1) is valid or invalid is stored. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

Un\G8233 Manufacturer code The information on the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module of another station is stored.Un\G8234 Model type

Un\G8235 Model code

Un\G8236 Version

Un\G8237 to Un\G8246 Model name string

Un\G8247 to Un\G8248 Vendor-specific device information

Un\G8249 to Un\G8255 System area

4 APPX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory

A

Communication path determination status The determination status on the communication path for each network number of the destination station is stored. 0: Route undetermined 1: Route determined

The numbers in the table indicate network numbers.

Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Un\G12080 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Un\G12081 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

Un\G12094 Emp ty

239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 228 227 226 225

Un\G12095 Empty

APPX Appendix 3 Buffer Memory 165

16

Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas The link special relay (SB) is turned on/off depending on various factors during data link. Any error status of the data link can be checked by using or monitoring it in the program.

Application of the link special relay (SB) By using the link special relay (SB), the status of CC-Link IE Controller Network can be checked from HMI (Human Machine Interfaces) as well as the engineering tool.

Refresh of the link special relay (SB) To use the link special relay (SB), set them in "Refresh Setting" in "Basic Settings" so that they are refreshed to the devices or labels of the CPU module. ( Page 84 Refresh Setting)

Mounting multiple network modules The link special relay (SB) of each network module is refreshed by the link special relay (SB) of the CPU module shown below when the refresh parameters of each network module remain default.

Ranges turned on/off by users and by the system The following ranges correspond to when the link special relay (SB) areas are assigned from SB0000 to SB01FF. Turned on/off by users: SB0000 to SB001F Turned on/off by the system: SB0020 to SB01FF

List of link special relay (SB) areas The following table lists the link special relay (SB) areas when they are assigned from SB0000 to SB01FF.

Do not turn on or off areas whose numbers are not on the following list or ranges turned on/off by the system. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.

Item Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Device No. SB0000 to SB01FF SB0200 to SB03FF SB0400 to SB05FF SB0600 to SB07FF

6 APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas

A

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

SB0000 Link startup of own station Starts cyclic transmission of the own station. Off: Startup not requested On: Startup requested (valid at rising edge) On state will be held even after completion of the startup command. Turn on 'link startup completion status of own station' (SB004D), then turn off SB0000. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. For SB0000 to SB0003, only one of the areas can be turned on.

SB0001 Link stop of own station Stops cyclic transmission of the own station. Off: Stop not requested On: Stop requested (valid at rising edge) On state will be held even after completion of the stop command. Turn on 'Link stop completion status of own station' (SB004F), then turn off SB0001. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. For SB0000 to SB0003, only one of the areas can be turned on.

SB0002 System link startup Starts cyclic transmission of the entire system. The station where cyclic transmission is started is specified in 'Link startup/stop direction' (SW0000) and 'Link startup/stop station specification' (SW0001 to SW0008). Off: Startup not requested On: Startup requested (valid at rising edge) On state will be held even after completion of the stop command. Turn on 'System link startup completion status' (SB0051), turn off SB0002. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. For SB0000 to SB0003, only one of the areas can be turned on.

SB0003 System link stop Stops cyclic transmission of the entire system. The station where cyclic transmission is stopped is specified in 'Link startup/stop direction' (SW0000) and 'Link startup/stop station specification' (SW0001 to SW0008). Off: Stop not requested On: Stop requested (valid at rising edge) On state will be held even after completion of the stop command. Turn on 'System link stop completion status' (SB0053), then turn off SB0003. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. For SB0000 to SB0003, only one of the areas can be turned on.

SB0007 When optical fiber cables are used Clear IN-side transmission error count

Clears the IN-side line error detection area (SB006E, SB0140, SW0068, SW0069, SW0074, SW0140 to SW0147) to 0. Off: Clear not requested On: Clear requested (valid while on)

When Ethernet cables are used Clear PORT1 transmission error count

Clears the P1-side line error detection area (SB006E, SB0140, SW0068, SW0069, SW0074, SW0120 to SW0127, SW0140 to SW0147) to 0. Off: Clear not requested On: Clear requested (valid while on)

SB0008 When optical fiber cables are used Clear OUT-side transmission error count

Clears the OUT-side line error detection area (SB006F, SB0150, SW006A, SW006B, SW0084, SW0150 to SW0157) to 0. Off: Clear not requested On: Clear requested (valid while on)

When Ethernet cables are used Clear PORT2 transmission error count

Clears the P2-side line error detection area (SB006F, SB0150, SW006A, SW006B, SW0084, SW0130 to SW0137, SW0150 to SW0157) to 0. Off: Clear not requested On: Clear requested (valid while on)

SB0009 Only when optical fiber cables are used Clear loop switching count

Clears the path switching detection area of the own station (SB008E, SB0160, SW006E, SW0160 to SW0167) and Transmission path switching history (Un\G2784 to Un\G2945) to 0. Off: Clear not requested On: Clear requested (valid while on)

SB000A Clear transient transmission error count

Clears the transient transmission error area of the own station (SB008F, SB0170, SW006F, SW0170 to SW0177) and Transient transmission error log (Un\G2592 to Un\G2753) to 0. Off: Clear not requested On: Clear requested (valid while on)

APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas 167

16

SB0017 Only when optical fiber cables are used Flag for disabling system switching due to data link error

Disables system switching due to data link error. Off: Enabled (A system switching request will be issued to the control system CPU module) On: Disabled (A system switching request will not be issued to the control system CPU

module)

SB0020 Communication status with the CPU module

Stores the communication status between a CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and a CPU module. Off: Normal On: Error

SB0030 RECV execution request flag CH1

Stores the data reception status of own station channel 1. Off: No data received On: Data received (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on, data prior to error is held.

SB0031 RECV execution request flag CH2

Stores the data reception status of own station channel 2. Off: No data received On: Data received (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on, data prior to error is held.

SB0032 RECV execution request flag CH3

Stores the data reception status of own station channel 3. Off: No data received On: Data received (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on, data prior to error is held.

SB0033 RECV execution request flag CH4

Stores the data reception status of own station channel 4. Off: No data received On: Data received (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on, data prior to error is held.

SB0034 RECV execution request flag CH5

Stores the data reception status of own station channel 5. Off: No data received On: Data received (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on, data prior to error is held.

SB0035 RECV execution request flag CH6

Stores the data reception status of own station channel 6. Off: No data received On: Data received (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on, data prior to error is held.

SB0036 RECV execution request flag CH7

Stores the data reception status of own station channel 7. Off: No data received On: Data received (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on, data prior to error is held.

SB0037 RECV execution request flag CH8

Stores the data reception status of own station channel 8. Off: No data received On: Data received (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on, data prior to error is held.

SB0040 Network type of own station

Stores the network type of the own station Off: Controller Network

SB0041 Redundant function information of own station

Stores the redundant system support information of own station. Off: Redundant function not supported On: Redundant function supported

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

8 APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas

A

SB0042 Power status of own station

Stores the external power supply status of own station. Off: External power supply not applied (EXT PW LED is off) On: External power supply applied (EXT PW LED is on) The SB0042 is always off for the CC-Link IE Controller Network module that does not have the external power supply function.

SB0043 Module operation mode of own station

Stores the module operation mode of the own station. Off: Online On: Other than online

SB0044 Station setting of own station

Stores the station type of the own station. Off: Normal station On: Control station

SB0047 Baton pass error status of own station

Stores the baton pass status (transient transmission availability) of the own station. Off: Normal On: Error When this relay is turned on, the cause of the error can be checked with 'Baton pass status of own station' (SW0047) and 'Cause of baton pass interruption' (SW0048). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Baton pass status of own station' (SW0047) and 'Cause of baton pass interruption' (SW0048) may be offset by one sequence scan.

SB0048 Station status of own station

Stores the station type (current status) of the own station. Off: Normal station On: Control station (when SB0044 is turned on)/sub-control station (when SB0044 is turned

off) (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0049 Data link error status of own station

Stores the data link status of the own station. Off: Normal On: Error When this relay is turned on, the cause of the error can be checked with 'Cause of data link stop' (SW0049). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Cause of data link stop' (SW0049) may be offset by one sequence scan.

SB004A CPU minor error status of own station

Stores the minor error occurrence status of the CPU module on the own station. Off: No minor error On: Minor error

SB004B CPU moderate/major error status of own station

Stores the moderate/major error occurrence status of the CPU module on own station. Off: No moderate/major error On: Moderate/major error

SB004C Link startup request accept status of own station

Stores the acceptance status of 'Link startup of own station' (SB0000). Off: Not accepted (SB0000 is off.) On: Accepted (SB0000 is on.) (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB004D Link startup completion status of own station

Stores the status of link startup processing requested with 'Link startup of own station' (SB0000). Off: Link startup not completed (SB0000, SB0050 are off.) On: Link startup completed (SB0000, SB0050 are on.) (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB004E Link stop request accept status of own station

Stores the acceptance status of 'Link stop of own station' (SB0001). Off: Not accepted (SB0001 is off.) On: Accepted (SB0001 is on.) (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas 169

17

SB004F Link stop completion status of own station

Stores the link stop processing status requested with 'Link stop of own station' (SB0001). Off: Not completed (SB0001, SB0052 are off.) On: Completed (SB0001, SB0052 are on.) (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0050 System link startup request accept status

Stores the acceptance status of 'System link startup' (SB0002). Off: Not accepted (SB0002 is off.) On: Accepted (SB0002 is on.) (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0051 System link startup completion status

Stores the status of link startup processing requested with 'System link startup' (SB0002). Off: Not completed (SB0002, SB0054 are off.) On: Completed (SB0002, SB0054 are on.) (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0052 System link stop request accept status

Stores the acceptance status of 'System link stop' (SB0003). Off: Not accepted (SB0003 is off.) On: Accepted (SB0003 is on.) (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0053 System link stop completion status

Stores the status of link stop processing requested with 'System link stop' (SB0003). Off: Not completed (SB0003, SB0056 are off.) On: Completed (SB0003, SB0056 are on.) (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0054 Parameter reception status Stores the status of parameter reception. For the control station, this relay stores the status of parameter reception from the CPU module. For the normal station, this relay stores the status of parameter reception from the control station. Off: Reception completed On: Reception not completed

SB0055 Received parameter error Stores the status of received parameter. (Own parameter status is stored for the control station.) Off: Parameters normal On: Parameter error

SB0056 Communication status Stores the transient transmission status. Off: Transient transmission by the control station On: Transient transmission by the sub-control station (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB005A Parameter type of control station

Stores the station type (mode) of the control station. Off: Control station On: Extended mode (control station)

SB005B CPU operating status of own station

Stores the operating status of the CPU module on the own station. Off: RUN On: STOP, PAUSE, or moderate/major error

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

0 APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas

A

SB005C Block 1 I/O master station Stores the I/O master station settings status of block 1 (LX/LY setting (1)). Off: No setting On: Set When this relay is turned on, the station number is stored in 'Block 1 I/O master station' (SW005C). (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is off.

SB005D Block 2 I/O master station Stores the I/O master station settings status of block 2 (LX/LY setting (2)). Off: No setting On: Set When this relay is turned on, the station number is stored in 'Block 2 I/O master station' (SW005D). (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is off.

SB005E CPU type of own station Stores the CPU type of the own station. Off: RCPU

SB0060 Constant link scan status Stores the constant link scan status. Off: No constant link scan time setting On: Set (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is off.

SB0061 Cyclic transmission punctuality assurance

Stores the status of cyclic transmission punctuality assurance. Off: Not assured On: Assured (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is off.

SB0063 Link points extended setting

Stores the status of link points extended setting. Off: Not to Extend On: Extend

SB0064 When optical fiber cables are used Loop status of own station

Stores the transmission path status of the own station. When this relay is turned on, the error definition can be checked with 'Loop status of own station' (SW0064). Off: Normal On: Error (Conditions) 'This relay is turned on when 'Loop status of own station' (SW0064) is not 00H.

When Ethernet cables are used Connection status of own station

Stores the transmission path status of the own station. When this relay is turned on, the error definition can be checked with 'Connection status of own station' (SW0064). Off: Normal On: Error (Conditions) 'Connection status of own station' (SW0064) is turned on except when the status is normal

and loopback is being performed.

SB0065 Loopback status When optical fiber cables are used Stores the loopback status for the loopback function. The station number of the loopback station can be checked with 'IN-side loopback station number' (SW0070) and 'OUT-side loopback station number' (SW0080). Off: Normal (no loopback stations) On: Loopback being performed (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

When Ethernet cables are used Stores the loopback status for the loopback function. The station number of the loopback station can be checked with 'Loopback station number 1' (SW0070) and 'Loopback station number 2' (SW0080). Off: Normal (no loopback stations) On: Loopback being performed (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas 171

17

SB0066 When optical fiber cables are used IN-side link-up status of own station

Stores the IN-side link-up status of the own station. Off: Link-up On: Link-down

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 link-up status of own station

Stores the P1-side link-up status of the own station. Off: Link-up On: Link-down

SB0067 When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side link-up status of own station

Stores the OUT-side link-up status of the own station. Off: Link-up On: Link-down

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 link-up status of own station

Stores the P2-side link-up status of the own station. Off: Link-up On: Link-down

SB0068 When optical fiber cables are used IN-side link establishing status of own station

Stores the IN-side link establishing status of the own station. Off: Link establishment completed On: Link establishing

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 link establishing status of own station

Stores the P1-side link establishing status of the own station. Off: Link establishment completed On: Link establishing

SB0069 When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side link establishing status of own station

Stores the OUT-side link establishing status of the own station. Off: Link establishment completed On: Link establishing

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 link establishing status of own station

Stores the P2-side link establishing status of the own station. Off: Link establishment completed On: Link establishing

SB006A Only when optical fiber cables are used IN-side cabling status of own station

Stores the IN-side cabling status of the own station. Off: Normal On: Inserted incorrectly

SB006B Only when optical fiber cables are used OUT-side cabling status of own station

Stores the OUT-side cabling status of the own station. Off: Normal On: Inserted incorrectly

SB006C When optical fiber cables are used IN-side current error frame reception status of own station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the IN side of the own station. Off: Not received On: Currently receiving

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 current error frame reception status of own station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the P1 side of the own station. Off: Not received On: Currently receiving

SB006D When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side current error frame reception status of own station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the OUT side of the own station. Off: Not received On: Currently receiving

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 current error frame reception status of own station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the P2 side of the own station. Off: Not received On: Currently receiving

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

2 APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas

A

SB006E When optical fiber cables are used IN-side error frame detection of own station

Stores whether the error frame was received at the IN side of the own station from power-on to the present. Off: Not received On: Received When 'Clear IN-side transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 error frame detection of own station

Stores whether the error frame was received at the P1 side of the own station from power-on to the present. Off: Not received On: Received When 'Clear PORT1 transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

SB006F When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side error frame detection of own station

Stores whether the error frame was received at the OUT side of the own station from power- on to the present. Off: Not received On: Received When 'Clear OUT-side transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 error frame detection of own station

Stores whether the error frame was received at the P2 side of the own station from power-on to the present. Off: Not received On: Received When 'Clear PORT2 transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

SB0070 Station number setting status of own station

Stores the station number setting status. Off: Station number set On: Station number not set (When the station number is set by the parameters, this relay is always off.)

SB0078 Only when Ethernet cables are used Network topology setting

Stores the setting status of "Network Topology" in "Basic Settings" for the own station (control station). Off: Line topology, star topology, or coexistence of star and line topologies On: Ring topology

SB007F IP address setting status Stores the status of the IP address setting by parameter. Off: No setting On: Set For normal stations, this relay stores the reception status of an IP address from the control station.

SB008E Only when optical fiber cables are used Path switching detection flag

Stores the path switching detection status. Off: Path switching not detected On: Path switching detected When 'Clear loop switching count' (SB0009) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

SB008F Transient error Stores the transient transmission error detection status. Off: Error not detected On: Error detected When this relay is turned on, the number of errors can be checked with 'Transient transmission error count' (SW006F).

SB0098 Only when Ethernet cables are used Network configuration mismatch occurrence status

Stores the match or mismatch status of the actual network configuration and the network map of the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. Off: Match On: Mismatch After return or addition of the normal station, SB0098 may be turned on regardless of the actual match/mismatch status.

SB0099 Only when Ethernet cables are used Number of connected modules over occurrence status

Stores whether the number of normal stations connected is 119 or less, or 120 or more. Off: 119 or less On: 120 or more Number of connected modules is the total of the normal stations which are currently connected and the disconnected stations (normal stations which were previously connected).

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas 173

17

SB00A0 Baton pass error status of each station

Stores the baton pass status of each station. Off: All stations normal On: Faulty station exists When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Baton pass status of each station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Baton pass status of each station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

SB00B0 Data link error status of each station

Stores the data link status of each station. Off: All stations normal On: Faulty station exists When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Data link status of each station' (SW00B0 to SW00B7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Data link status of each station' (SW00B0 to SW00B7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

SB00C0 Reserved station setting status

Stores whether a reserved station is set. Off: No setting On: Set When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Reserved station setting status' (SW00C0 to SW00C7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Reserved station setting status' (SW00C0 to SW00C7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is off.

SB00D0 Parameter communication status of each station

Stores the parameter communication status of each station. Off: Parameter communication is completed or not executed in all stations On: Station where parameter communication is in execution exists When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Parameter communication status of each station' (SW00D0 to SW00D7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Parameter communication status of each station' (SW00D0 to SW00D7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

SB00E0 Parameter error status of each station

Stores the parameter error status of each station. Off: All stations normal On: Faulty station exists When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Parameter error status of each station' (SW00E0 to SW00E7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Parameter error status of each station' (SW00E0 to SW00E7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

Reserved stations and stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

SB00F0 CPU operating status of each station

Stores the operating status of the CPU module on each station. (Including own station) Off: All stations are at RUN or STEP-RUN state On: Station at STOP or PAUSE state, or station with a moderate/major error exists. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'CPU operating status of each station' (SW00F0 to SW00F7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'CPU operating status of each station' (SW00F0 to SW00F7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

4 APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas

A

SB0100 CPU moderate/major error status of each station

Stores the moderate/major error occurrence status of the CPU module on each station. Off: No moderate/major error On: Station with a moderate/major error exists When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'CPU moderate/ major error status of each station' (SW0100 to SW0107). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'CPU moderate/major error status of each station' (SW0100 to SW0107) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0110 CPU minor error status of each station

Stores the minor error occurrence status of the CPU module on each station. Off: All stations normal or station with a moderate/major error exists. On: Station with a minor error exists. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'CPU minor error status of each station' (SW0110 to SW0117). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'CPU minor error status of each station' (SW0110 to SW0117) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0120 When optical fiber cables are used IN-side current error frame reception status of each station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the IN side of each station. Off: Not received at all stations

When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'IN-side current error frame reception status of each station' (SW0120 to SW0127). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'IN-side current error frame reception status of each station' (SW0120 to SW0127) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 current error frame reception status of each station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the P1 side of each station. Off: Not received at all stations On: Error frame is being received at one or more stations. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'PORT1 current error frame reception status of each station' (SW0120 to SW0127). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'PORT1 current error frame reception status of each station' (SW0120 to SW0127) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0130 When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side current error frame reception status of each station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the OUT side of each station. Off: Not received at all stations On: Error frame is being received at one or more stations. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'OUT-side current error frame reception status of each station' (SW0130 to SW0137). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'OUT-side current error frame reception status of each station' (SW0130 to SW0137) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 current error frame reception status of each station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the P2 side of each station. Off: Not received at all stations On: Error frame is being received at one or more stations. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'PORT2 current error frame reception status of each station' (SW0130 to SW0137). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'PORT2 current error frame reception status of each station' (SW0130 to SW0137) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas 175

17

SB0140 When optical fiber cables are used IN-side error frame detection status of each station

Stores the status that has received an error frame from power-on until the present at the IN side of each station. Off: Not received at all stations On: Error frame has been received at one or more stations. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'IN-side error frame detection status of each station' (SW0140 to SW0147). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'IN-side error frame detection status of each station' (SW0140 to SW0147) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 error frame detection of each station

Stores whether the error frame was received at the P1 side of each station from power-on to the present. Off: Not received at all stations On: Error frame has been received at one or more stations. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'PORT1 error frame detection of each station' (SW0140 to SW0147). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'PORT1 error frame detection of each station' (SW0140 to SW0147) may be offset by one sequence scan. When 'Clear PORT1 transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored value is cleared. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0150 When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side error frame detection status of each station

Stores the status that has received an error frame from power-on until the present at the OUT side of each station. Off: Not received at all stations On: Error frame has been received at one or more stations. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'OUT-side error frame detection status of each station' (SW0150 to SW0157). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'OUT-side error frame detection status of each station' (SW0150 to SW0157) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 error frame detection of each station

Stores whether the error frame was received at the P2 side of the station No.0 from power-on to the present. Off: Not received at all stations On: Error frame has been received at one or more stations. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'PORT2 error frame detection of each station' (SW0150 to SW0157). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'PORT2 error frame detection of each station' (SW0150 to SW0157) may be offset by one sequence scan. When 'Clear PORT2 transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored value is cleared. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0160 Only when optical fiber cables are used Path switching detection flag of each station

Stores the detection status of path switching of each station. (Including own station) Off: Path switching not detected On: Path switching detected When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Path switching detection status of each station' (SW0160 to SW0167). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Path switching detection status of each station' (SW0160 to SW0167) may be offset by one sequence scan. The path switching detection status is cleared when 'Clear loop switching count' (SB0009) is turned on. The stored value is cleared when 'Clear loop switching count' (SB0009) is turned on in each station and the path switching detection status for all stations is cleared. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

6 APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas

A

SB0170 Transient error of each station

Stores the transient transmission error detection status for all stations. (Including own station) Off: Error not detected On: Error detected When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Transient error detection status of each station' (SW0170 to SW0177). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Transient error detection status of each station' (SW0170 to SW0177) may be offset by one sequence scan. The transient error detection status of the own station is cleared when 'Clear transient transmission error count' (SB000A) is turned on. The stored value is cleared when 'Clear transient transmission error count' (SB000A) is turned on in each station and the transient error detection status for all stations is cleared. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0180 External power supply information of each station

Stores the external electrical supply status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module for each station. (Including own station) Off: No external power supplied to any station On: External power supplied to station(s) When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'External power supply status of each station' (SW0180 to SW0187). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'External power supply status of each station' (SW0180 to SW0187) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB0190 External power supply error information of each station

Stores the external power supply error status of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module with external power supply function on each station. (Including own station) Off: All stations normal or no stations providing external power supply On: Faulty station exists When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'External power supply error status of each station' (SW0190 to SW0197). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'External power supply error status of each station' (SW0190 to SW0197) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB01A0 Group cyclic transmission station information

Stores shared group setting information on the stations. (Including own station) Off: Station in shared group different from the own station not exist. On: Station in shared group different from the own station exists. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Group cyclic transmission station information' (SW01A0 to SW01A7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Group cyclic transmission station information' (SW01A0 to SW01A7) may be offset by one sequence scan.

SB01B0 CPU type information of each station

Stores the CPU type information of each station. (Including own station) Off: No basic model QCPU or safe CPU On: Basic model QCPU or safe CPU present When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'CPU type information of each station' (SW01B0 to SW01B7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'CPU type information of each station' (SW01B0 to SW01B7) may be offset by one sequence scan.

SB01C0 Redundant system information

Stores the redundant system information of each station. (Including own station) Off: No redundant system station On: Redundant system station exists. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Redundant function information of each station' (SW01C0 to SW01C7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Redundant function information of each station' (SW01C0 to SW01C7) may be offset by one sequence scan.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas 177

17

SB01D0 Separate-mode station exists information

Stores the CPU operation mode status of each station. (Including own station) Off: No separate mode station On: Separate mode station exists. This relay is turned off for a station other than a redundant system station. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Separate mode status of each station' (SW01D0 to SW01D7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Separate mode status of each station' (SW01D0 to SW01D7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB01E0 Pairing-set station exists information

Stores the pairing setting status of each station. (Including own station) Off: No pairing-set station On: Pairing-set station exists. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Pairing setting status of each station' (SW01E0 to SW01E7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Pairing setting status of each station' (SW01E0 to SW01E7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SB01F0 Station of standby system exists information

Stores the CPU operation status (control/standby system) of each station. (Including own station) Off: No station of standby system CPU On: Station of standby system CPU exists. This relay is turned off for a station other than a redundant system station. When this relay is turned on, the status of each station can be checked with 'Redundant CPU system status of each station' (SW01F0 to SW01F7). Depending on the link refresh timing, the update of 'Redundant CPU system status of each station' (SW01F0 to SW01F7) may be offset by one sequence scan. (Conditions) This relay is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

8 APPX Appendix 4 List of Link Special Relay (SB) Areas

A

Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas The link special register (SW) stores the information during data link as a numerical value. Error locations and causes can be checked by using or monitoring the link special register (SW) in programs.

Application of the link special register (SW) By using the link special register (SW), the status of CC-Link IE Controller Network can be checked from HMI (Human Machine Interfaces) as well as the engineering tool.

Refresh of the link special register (SW) To use the link special register (SW), set them in "Refresh Setting" under "Basic Settings" so that they are refreshed to the devices or labels of the CPU module. ( Page 84 Refresh Setting)

Mounting multiple network modules The link special register (SW) of each network module is refreshed by the link special register (SW) of the CPU module shown below when the refresh parameters of each network module remain default.

Range where data are stored by users and range where data are stored by the system The following ranges correspond to when the link special register (SW) areas are assigned from SW0000 to SW01FF. Stored by users: SW0000 to SW001F Stored by the system: SW0020 to SW01FF

List of link special register (SW) areas The following table lists the link special register (SW) areas when they are assigned from SW0000 to SW01FF.

Do not write any data to an area whose number is not on the following list or ranges where data are stored by the system. Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system.

Item Module 1 Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 Device No. SW0000 to SW01FF SW0200 to SW03FF SW0400 to SW05FF SW0600 to SW07FF

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 179

18

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

SW0000 Link startup/stop direction

Set the content of link startup/stop directions. 00H: Own station 01H: All stations 02H: Specified stations 03H: Specified group 80H: Own station enforced (enabled only for link startup) 81H: All stations enforced (enabled only for link startup) 82H: Specified stations enforced (enabled only for link startup) 83H: Specified group enforced (enabled only for link startup) Link startup is performed by 'System link startup' (SB0002) or 'System link stop' (SB0003).

SW0001 to SW0008

Link startup/stop station specification

Set the station number to start or stop data link when 02H or 82H is set in 'Link startup/stop direction' (SW0000). 0: Startup or stop not requested 1: Startup or stop requested

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0.

SW0009 RIRD/RIWT instruction arrival monitoring time

Specify the monitoring time until the instruction completion. If the instruction is not completed within the time, it will be resent the number of times specified in 'RIRD/RIWT instruction resend count' (SW000B). 0: 10 seconds (default) 1 to 360: 1 to 360 seconds If a value other than the above is specified, 360 seconds will be applied.

SW000B RIRD/RIWT instruction resend count

Specify the number of times the instruction is to be resent when it is not completed within the monitoring time specified in 'RIRD/RIWT instruction arrival monitoring time' (SW0009). 0: Not resent (default) 1 to 7: 1 to 7 times If a value other than the above is specified, 7 times will be applied.

SW0012 to SW0013

Link startup/stop group specification

Set the transient transmission group number to start or stop data link when 03H or 83H is set in 'Link startup/stop direction' (SW0000). 0: Startup or stop not requested 1: Startup or stop requested

Each number in the table represents a transient transmission group number.

SW0020 Communication status with the CPU module

Stores the status of communications between a CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module and a CPU module. 0: Normal 1 or greater: Error (An error code is stored.)

SW0030 Link dedicated instructions processing result CH1

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used channel 1 of the own station. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW0031 Link dedicated instructions processing result CH2

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used channel 2 of the own station. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW0032 Link dedicated instructions processing result CH3

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used channel 3 of the own station. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0001

SW0002

SW0003

SW0004

SW0005

SW0006

SW0007

SW0008

SW0012

SW0013

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

0 APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas

A

SW0033 Link dedicated instructions processing result CH4

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used channel 4 of the own station. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW0034 Link dedicated instructions processing result CH5

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used channel 5 of the own station. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW0035 Link dedicated instructions processing result CH6

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used channel 6 of the own station. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW0036 Link dedicated instructions processing result CH7

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used channel 7 of the own station. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW0037 Link dedicated instructions processing result CH8

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used channel 8 of the own station. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW0038 Only when optical fiber cables are used Link dedicated instructions processing result CH9

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used channel 9 of the own station. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW0039 Only when optical fiber cables are used Link dedicated instructions processing result CH10

Stores the processing results of the link dedicated instruction that used channel 10 of the own station. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW003A ZNRD processing result

Stores the processing result of the ZNRD instruction. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW003B ZNWR processing result

Stores the processing result of the ZNWR instruction. 0: Completed normally 1 or greater: Completed with an error (An error code is stored.)

SW0040 Network number Stores the network number of the own station. Range: 1 to 239

SW0041 Transient transmission group number

Stores the transient transmission group number of the own station. 0: No group specification 1 to 32: Transient transmission group number

SW0042 Station number Stores the station number of the own station. 1 to 120: Station number of own station ('Station number setting status of own station' (SB0070) is off) 255: Station number not determined ('Station number setting status of own station' (SB0070) is on)

SW0043 Mode status of own station

Stores the module operation mode of the own station. 0: Online mode 2: Offline mode B: Module communication test mode

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 181

18

SW0044 Station setting Stores the settings status of the own station.

SW0046 Module type When optical fiber cables are used Stores the hardware status of the own station.

b14: Fixed to 1 (used in the system)

When Ethernet cables are used Stores the hardware status of the own station.

b14: Fixed to 1 (used in the system) b15: Variable (used in the system)

SW0047 Baton pass status of own station

Stores the baton pass status (transient transmission availability) of the own station. 0: Data link in progress 1: Data link stop 2: Baton pass in progress 3: Baton pass being terminated 4: Test in progress 5: Offline

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

b15b14 b3b4b5b6b7 b2 b1 b0

SW0044 0

00 1000

Network type 01: CC-Link IE Controller Network Station type 0: Normal station 1: Control station

CPU type 0: Other than basic model QCPUs and safety CPUs 1: Basic model QCPU or safety CPU

Station type (mode) 0: Control station, Normal station 1: Extended mode (control station, normal station)

b14 b9 b3b4b5

00

b6b7b8 b2 b1 b0

SW0046 1

b13

0

b15

0 00001000

Transmission path information 1 00: Optical Transmission path information 2 0: Duplex system Topology 0: Loop type Cable type 0: Supports SX

External power supply function 0: Not available 1: Available

Model type 001: Module

b13b15 b9 b3b4b5b6b7b8 b2 b1 b0

SW0046 0

b14

1* 0111001000

Transmission path information 1 10: Twisted pair Transmission path information 2 1: Simplex system Topology 1: Bus/line/star type Cable type Fixed to 0

Model type 001: Module

2 APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas

A

SW0048 Cause of baton pass interruption

When optical fiber cables are used Stores the cause of interruption in the communication (baton pass) of the own station. 00H: Normal communication 30H: At cable disconnection or power-on 31H: Cable insertion error 32H: Cable IN-OUT checking 33H: Disconnection or return in progress 40H: Offline mode 50H: Self-diagnostics in execution

When Ethernet cables are used Stores the cause of interruption in the communication (baton pass) of the own station. 00H: Normal communication 30H: At cable disconnection or power-on 33H: Disconnection or return in progress 40H: Offline mode

SW0049 Cause of data link stop

When optical fiber cables are used Stores the cause which stopped the data link of the own station. 00H: Normal communication 01H: Stop direction 02H: Monitoring time timeout 10H: Parameter unreceived 11H: Station number of the own station out of the range 12H: Own station reserved 13H: Own station number duplication 14H: Control station duplication 15H: Control station duplication and own station number duplication 16H: Station number not set 17H: Network number irregularity 18H: Parameter error 19H: Parameter communication in progress 20H: CPU module stop error 21H: CPU module power stop error A CPU module power stop error (21H) is detected in the RJ71GP21S-SX. This error is detected when the CPU module is powered off.

When Ethernet cables are used Stores the cause which stopped the data link of the own station. 00H: Normal communication 01H: Stop direction 02H: Monitoring time timeout 10H: Parameter unreceived 11H: Station number of the own station out of the range 12H: Own station reserved 13H: Own station number duplication 14H: Control station duplication 15H: Control station duplication and own station number duplication 16H: Station number not set 17H: Network number irregularity 18H: Parameter error 19H: Parameter communication in progress 20H: CPU module stop error 60H: The network is incorrectly configured in ring topology (only for control station).

SW004A Data link stop request station

Stores the station number of the station that performed the data link stop request for the own station. Range: 1 to 120 The data link stop request is performed by 'System link stop' (SB0003). (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 183

18

SW004B CPU status of own station

Stores the status of the CPU module of the own station. 00H: No module mounted 01H: STOP (normal) 02H: STOP (moderate/major error) 03H: STOP (minor error) 04H: RUN (normal) 05H: RUN (minor error) 07H: PAUSE 0EH: Reset in progress 0FH: Initial processing

SW004C Shared group number

Stores the shared group number of the own station. 0: No shared group setting 1 to 120: Shared group number

SW004D Link startup result of own station

Stores the results when link is started by 'Link startup of own station' (SB0000). 0: Normal 1 or greater: Error (An error code is stored.) (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW004F Link stop result of own station

Stores the results when link is stopped by 'Link stop of own station' (SB0001). 0: Normal 1 or greater: Error (An error code is stored.) (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW0051 System link startup result

Stores the results when link is started by 'System link startup' (SB0002). 0: Normal 1 or greater: Error definition in own station (An error code is stored.) (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW0053 System link stop result

Stores the results when link is stopped by 'System link stop' (SB0003). 0: Normal 1 or greater: Error definition in own station (An error code is stored.) (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW0054 Parameter information

Stores parameter information.

(Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Received parameter error' (SB0055) is off.

SW0055 Parameter setting status

Stores the parameter status. 0: Normal 1 or greater: Error (An error code is stored.) (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Received parameter error' (SB0055) is on.

SW0056 Current control station number

Stores the station number of the station which is actually operating as a control station. (Including sub-control station) Range: 1 to 120

SW0057 Specified control station number

Stores the control station number that has been set using a parameter. 0: Control station or sub-control station does not exist in a network. 1 to 120: Station number of the control station

SW0059 Total number of link stations

Stores the total number of stations which is set by a parameter. Range: 2 to 120

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

b15 b2 b1 b0

0 0

Network range assignment setting 0: Not set 1: Set

Refresh parameter setting or interrupt setting 0: Not set 1: Set

4 APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas

A

SW005A Maximum baton pass station number

Stores the maximum station number of the stations where the baton pass is normally performed. Range: 2 to 120 (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW005B Maximum data link station number

Stores the maximum station number of the station where the data link is normally performed. Range: 1 to 120 (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is off.

SW005C Block 1 I/O master station

Stores the I/O master station number of block 1 (LX/LY setting (1)). 0: No I/O master station 1 to 120: Station number (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is off.

SW005D Block 2 I/O master station

Stores the I/O master station number of block 2 (LX/LY setting (2)). 0: No I/O master station 1 to 120: Station number (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is off.

SW0060 Maximum link scan time

Stores the maximum value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission. (Unit: ms) (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW0061 Minimum link scan time

Stores the minimum value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission. (Unit: ms) (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW0062 Current link scan time

Stores the present value of the link scan time during cyclic transmission. (Unit: ms) The stored value contains a maximum error of 1ms. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW0063 Constant link scan time setting value

Stores the setting value of the constant link scan which is set by a parameter. 0: No setting 1 to 500: Setting value of constant link scan (Unit: ms) (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is off.

SW0064 When optical fiber cables are used Loop status of own station

Stores the transmission path status of the own station. 00H: Normal 12H: IN side loopback (OUT side cable disconnection) 13H: IN side loopback (OUT-side cable insertion error) 14H: IN side loopback (OUT-side line establishing) 21H: OUT side loopback (IN-side cable disconnection) 31H: OUT side loopback (IN-side cable insertion error) 41H: OUT side loopback (IN-side line establishing) 22H: Disconnecting (IN-side or OUT-side cable disconnection) 23H: Disconnecting (IN-side cable disconnection, OUT-side cable insertion error) 24H: Disconnecting (IN-side cable disconnection, OUT-side line establishing) 32H: Disconnecting (IN-side cable insertion error, OUT-side cable disconnection) 33H: Disconnecting (IN-side or OUT-side cable insertion error) 34H: Disconnecting (IN-side cable insertion error, OUT-side line establishing) 42H: Disconnecting (IN-side line establishing, OUT-side cable disconnection) 43H: Disconnecting (IN-side line establishing, OUT-side cable insertion error) 44H: Disconnecting (IN-side or OUT-side line establishing)

When Ethernet cables are used Connection status of own station

Stores the connection status of the own station. 00H: Normal (communication in progress on P1 and P2) 02H: Normal (communication in progress on P1, cable disconnected on P2) 20H: Normal (cable disconnected on P1, communication in progress on P2) 12H: Loopback on P1 (cable disconnected on P2) 21H: Loopback on P2 (cable disconnected on P1) 22H: Disconnecting (cable disconnected on P1 and P2) 24H: Disconnecting (cable disconnected on P1, establishing line on P2) 42H: Disconnecting (establishing line on P1, cable disconnected on P2) 44H: Disconnecting (establishing line on P1 and P2)

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 185

18

SW0065 Loopback information

Stores the network loop status. 0: Normal 1: Loopback (enabled only when "Network Topology" under "Basic Settings" of the control station is set to "Ring" for Ethernet cables) 2: Errors on all stations

SW0068 When optical fiber cables are used IN-side line error occurrence rate maximum value

Stores the occurrence rate (maximum value) of received error frames at the IN side of the own station. (Unit: %) When 'Clear IN-side transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored value for the occurrence rate is cleared.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 line error occurrence rate maximum value

Stores the occurrence rate (maximum value) of received error frames at the P1 side of the own station. (Unit: %) When 'Clear PORT1 transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored value for the occurrence rate is cleared.

SW0069 When optical fiber cables are used IN-side line error occurrence rate present value

Stores the occurrence rate (present value) of received error frames at the IN side of the own station. (Unit: %) When 'Clear IN-side transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored value for the occurrence rate is cleared.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 line error occurrence rate present value

Stores the occurrence rate (present value) of received error frames at the P1 side of the own station. (Unit: %) When 'Clear PORT1 transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored value for the occurrence rate is cleared.

SW006A When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side line error occurrence rate maximum value

Stores the occurrence rate (maximum value) of received error frames at the OUT side of the own station. (Unit: %) When 'Clear OUT-side transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored value for the occurrence rate is cleared.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 line error occurrence rate maximum value

Stores the occurrence rate (maximum value) of received error frames at the P2 side of the own station. (Unit: %) When 'Clear PORT2 transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored value for the occurrence rate is cleared.

SW006B When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side line error occurrence rate present value

Stores the occurrence rate (present value) of received error frames at the OUT side of the own station. (Unit: %) When 'Clear OUT-side transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored value for the occurrence rate is cleared.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 line error occurrence rate present value

Stores the occurrence rate (present value) of received error frames at the P2 side of the own station. (Unit: %) When 'Clear PORT2 transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored value for the occurrence rate is cleared.

SW006E Only when optical fiber cables are used Number of loop switches

Stores the number of switches (cumulative) of the communication path. When 'Clear loop switching count' (SB0009) is turned on, the stored value for the number of errors is cleared. When FFFFH (maximum value 65535) is counted, counting stops.

SW006F Transient transmission error count

Stores the cumulative count of transient transmission errors. When 'Clear transient transmission error count' (SB000A) is turned on, the stored value for the number of errors is cleared. Range: 0 to 16 If count reaches the maximum value 16, the count stops.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

6 APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas

A

SW0070 When optical fiber cables are used IN-side loopback station number

Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed on the IN side. 0: No loopback stations 1 to 120: Station number 255: Station number not set (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

When Ethernet cables are used Loopback station number 1

Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed. The other station numbers where loopback is being performed can be checked with 'Loopback station number 2' (SW0080). 0: No loopback stations 1 to 120: Station number 255: Station number not set (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off and

'Network configuration mismatch occurrence status' (SB0098) is off. When 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error

is held.

SW0071 Only when optical fiber cables are used IN-side loopback factor

Stores the cause of loopback on the IN side. 00H: No loopback stations 02H: OUT-side cable disconnection 03H: OUT-side cable insertion error 04H: OUT-side line settling (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW0072 Only when optical fiber cables are used OUT-side mis- cabling station number

Stores the station number of the station where the OUT side cable is incorrectly inserted. The station number stored is the number for the other station the cable is connected to.

0: No station connects cable incorrectly 1 to 120: Station number (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled when 'IN-side loopback factor' (SW0071) is 03H (OUT side cable

inserted incorrectly).

SW0074 When optical fiber cables are used IN-side cable disconnection detection count

Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the IN side. When 'Clear IN-side transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored detection count is cleared. When FFFFH (maximum value 65535) is counted, counting stops.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 cable disconnection detection count

Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the P1 side. When 'Clear PORT1 transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored detection count is cleared. When FFFFH (maximum value 65535) is counted, counting stops.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

SW0072: 3 SW0072: 3 SW0072: 2 SW0072: 2

Station No.1 Station No.2 Station No.3 Station No.4

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 187

18

SW0080 When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side loopback station number

Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed on the OUT side. 0: No loopback stations 1 to 120: Station number 255: Station number not set (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

When Ethernet cables are used Loopback station number 2

Stores the number of the station where loopback is being performed. The other station numbers where loopback is being performed can be checked with 'Loopback station number 1' (SW0070). 0: No loopback stations 1 to 120: Station number 255: Station number not set (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off and

'Network configuration mismatch occurrence status' (SB0098) is off. When 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error

is held.

SW0081 Only when optical fiber cables are used OUT-side loopback factor

Stores the cause of loopback on the OUT side. 00H: No loopback stations 20H: IN-side cable disconnection 30H: IN-side cable insertion error 40H: IN-side line establishing (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW0082 Only when optical fiber cables are used IN-side mis-cabling station number

Stores the station number of the station where the IN side cable is incorrectly inserted. The station number stored is the number for the other station the cable is connected to.

0: No station connects cable incorrectly 1 to 120: Station number (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled when 'OUT-side loopback factor' (SW0081) is 30H (IN side cable

inserted incorrectly).

SW0084 When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side cable disconnection detection count

Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the OUT side. When 'Clear OUT-side transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored detection count is cleared. When FFFFH (maximum value 65535) is counted, counting stops.

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 cable disconnection detection count

Stores the cumulative count that was detected for cable disconnections at the P2 side. When 'Clear PORT2 transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored detection count is cleared. When FFFFH (maximum value 65535) is counted, counting stops.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

OUT

SW0082: 3 SW0082: 3 SW0082: 2 SW0082: 2

Station No.1 Station No.2 Station No.3 Station No.4

8 APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas

A

SW00A0 to SW00A7

Baton pass status of each station

Stores the baton pass status of each station. 0: Baton pass normal station 1: Baton pass faulty station

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

SW00B0 to SW00B7

Data link status of each station

Stores the data link status for each station. 0: Data link normal station 1: Data link faulty station

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. When group cyclic transmission is used, a station whose shared group is different from the group of the own station is detected as a cyclic transmission error station. (Including reserved stations) (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

SW00C0 to SW00C7

Reserved station setting status

Stores the reserved station setting status for each station. 0: A station other than a reserved station 1: Reserved station

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Data link error status of own station' (SB0049) is off. Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW00A1

SW00A2

SW00A3

SW00A4

SW00A5

SW00A6

SW00A7

SW00A0

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW00B1

SW00B2

SW00B3

SW00B4

SW00B5

SW00B6

SW00B7

SW00B0

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW00C1

SW00C2

SW00C3

SW00C4

SW00C5

SW00C6

SW00C7

SW00C0

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 189

19

SW00D0 to SW00D7

Parameter communication status of each station

Stores the parameter communication status of each station. 0: Parameter communication completed or not executed 1: Parameter communication in progress

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

SW00E0 to SW00E7

Parameter error status of each station

Stores the parameter error status of each station. 0: No error 1: Errors

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

SW00F0 to SW00F7

CPU operating status of each station

Stores the status of the CPU module for each station. (Including own station) 0: RUN, STEP-RUN 1: STOP, PAUSE, or a moderate or serious error occurring

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW00D1

SW00D2

SW00D3

SW00D4

SW00D5

SW00D6

SW00D7

SW00D0

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW00E1

SW00E2

SW00E3

SW00E4

SW00E5

SW00E6

SW00E7

SW00E0

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW00F1

SW00F2

SW00F3

SW00F4

SW00F5

SW00F6

SW00F7

SW00F0

0 APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas

A

SW0100 to SW0107

CPU moderate/major error status of each station

Stores the moderate/major error occurrence status of the CPU module on each station. (Including own station) 0: No moderate/major error 1: Moderate or serious error occurring

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

SW0110 to SW0117

CPU minor error status of each station

Stores the minor error occurrence status of the CPU module on each station. (Including own station) 0: Normal operation, or a moderate or serious error occurring 1: Minor error occurring

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0101

SW0102

SW0103

SW0104

SW0105

SW0106

SW0107

SW0100

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0111

SW0112

SW0113

SW0114

SW0115

SW0116

SW0117

SW0110

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 191

19

SW0120 to SW0127

When optical fiber cables are used IN-side current error frame reception status of each station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the IN side of each station. 0: Not receiving 1: Currently receiving

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7).

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 current error frame reception status of each station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the P1 side of each station. 0: Not receiving 1: Currently receiving When 'Clear PORT1 transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7).

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0121

SW0122

SW0123

SW0124

SW0125

SW0126

SW0127

SW0120

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0191

SW0192

SW0193

SW0194

SW0195

SW0196

SW0197

SW0190

2 APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas

A

SW0130 to SW0137

When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side current error frame reception status of each station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the OUT side of each station. 0: Not receiving 1: Currently receiving

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7).

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 current error frame reception status of each station

Stores whether the error frame is currently received at the P2 side of each station. 0: Not receiving 1: Currently receiving When 'Clear PORT2 transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7).

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0131

SW0132

SW0133

SW0134

SW0135

SW0136

SW0137

SW0130

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0131

SW0132

SW0133

SW0134

SW0135

SW0136

SW0137

SW0130

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 193

19

SW0140 to SW0147

When optical fiber cables are used IN-side error frame detection status of each station

Stores the status that has received an error frame from power-on until the present at the IN side of each station. 0: Not received 1: Received When 'Clear IN-side transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7).

When Ethernet cables are used PORT1 error frame detection of each station

Stores whether the error frame was received at the P1 side of each station from power-on to the present. 0: Not received 1: Received When 'Clear PORT1 transmission error count' (SB0007) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7).

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0141

SW0142

SW0143

SW0144

SW0145

SW0146

SW0147

SW0140

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0141

SW0142

SW0143

SW0144

SW0145

SW0146

SW0147

SW0140

4 APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas

A

SW0150 to SW0157

When optical fiber cables are used OUT-side error frame detection status of each station

Stores the status that has received an error frame from power-on until the present at the OUT side of each station. 0: Not received 1: Received When 'Clear OUT-side transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7).

When Ethernet cables are used PORT2 error frame detection of each station

Stores whether the error frame was received at the P2 side of the station No.0 from power-on to the present. 0: Not received 1: Received When 'Clear PORT2 transmission error count' (SB0008) is turned on, the stored value is cleared.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7).

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0151

SW0152

SW0153

SW0154

SW0155

SW0156

SW0157

SW0150

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0151

SW0152

SW0153

SW0154

SW0155

SW0156

SW0157

SW0150

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 195

19

SW0160 to SW0167

Only when optical fiber cables are used Path switching detection status of each station

Stores the path switching detection status of each station from power-on to the present. 0: Not received 1: Detected The path switching detection status is cleared when 'Clear loop switching count' (SB0009) is turned on. Turn on 'Clear loop switching count' (SB0009) when clearing the path switching detection status of other stations.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

SW0170 to SW0177

Transient error detection status of each station

Stores the transient transmission error detection status of each station from power-on to the present. 0: Not received 1: Detected The transient error detection status of the own station is cleared when 'Clear transient transmission error count' (SB000A) is turned on. Turn on 'Clear transient transmission error count' (SB000A) at other station side when clearing the transient error detection status of other stations.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0161

SW0162

SW0163

SW0164

SW0165

SW0166

SW0167

SW0160

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0171

SW0172

SW0173

SW0174

SW0175

SW0176

SW0177

SW0170

6 APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas

A

SW0180 to SW0187

External power supply status of each station

Stores the power supply status for external power supply by the CC-Link IE Controller Network module with external power supply function of each station. (Including own station) 0: Not supplied 1: Supplied This register is always off when the CC-Link IE Controller Network module does not have the external power supply function.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

SW0190 to SW0197

External power supply error status of each station

Stores the power supply error status for external power supply by the CC-Link IE Controller Network module with external power supply function of each station. (Including own station) 0: Normal 1: Error This register is always off when the CC-Link IE Controller Network module does not have the external power supply function.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

SW01A0 to SW01A7

Group cyclic transmission station information

Stores shared group setting information of each station. (Including own station) 0: Station in same shared group as own station or station with no shared group setting 1: Station in shared group different from own station Cyclic data from stations in different shared groups are not received.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0181

SW0182

SW0183

SW0184

SW0185

SW0186

SW0187

SW0180

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW0191

SW0192

SW0193

SW0194

SW0195

SW0196

SW0197

SW0190

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW01A1

SW01A2

SW01A3

SW01A4

SW01A5

SW01A6

SW01A7

SW01A0

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 197

19

SW01B0 to SW01B7

CPU type information of each station

Stores the CPU type information of each station. (Including own station) 0: Other than basic model QCPU and safe CPU 1: Basic model QCPU or safe CPU

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

SW01C0 to SW01C7

Redundant function information of each station

Stores redundant system support information of Redundant CPU or CC-Link IE Controller Network module of each station. (Including own station) 0: Redundant function not supported 1: Redundant function supported

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

SW01D0 to SW01D7

Separate mode status of each station

Stores the redundant system CPU operating mode of each station. (Including own station) 0: Backup mode 1: Separate mode Stores 0 for a station other than a redundant system station.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW01B1

SW01B2

SW01B3

SW01B4

SW01B5

SW01B6

SW01B7

SW01B0

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW01C1

SW01C2

SW01C3

SW01C4

SW01C5

SW01C6

SW01C7

SW01C0

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW01D1

SW01D2

SW01D3

SW01D4

SW01D5

SW01D6

SW01D7

SW01D0

8 APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas

A

SW01E0 to SW01E7

Pairing setting status of each station

Stores the pairing setting status for each station. (Including own station) 0: No pairing setting 1: Pairing-set If pairing is set, the bit corresponding to the system B station is turned on. Stores 0 for a station other than a redundant system station.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Stations higher than the maximum station number are ignored.

SW01F0 to SW01F7

Redundant CPU system status of each station

Stores the redundant CPU system status (control/standby system) of each station. (Including own station) 0: Control system 1: Standby system Stores 0 for a station other than a redundant system station.

Each number in the table represents a station number. is fixed to 0. (Conditions) This register is enabled when 'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is off. When

'Baton pass error status of own station' (SB0047) is turned on (error), data prior to error is held. This register is enabled only for normally operating stations in 'Baton pass status of each

station' (SW00A0 to SW00A7). Reserved stations and stations with a number equal to or greater than the maximum station

number are ignored.

No. Name Description Availability

Control station

Normal station

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW01E1

SW01E2

SW01E3

SW01E4

SW01E5

SW01E6

SW01E7

SW01E0

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81

112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97

120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113

SW01F1

SW01F2

SW01F3

SW01F4

SW01F5

SW01F6

SW01F7

SW01F0

APPX Appendix 5 List of Link Special Register (SW) Areas 199

20

Appendix 6 Dedicated Instruction This section describes dedicated instructions that can be used in the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped modules.

For details on dedicated instructions, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Module Dedicated Instructions)

Link dedicated instructions The following table lists the instructions used for transient transmission to or from programmable controllers on other stations. Each link dedicated instruction allows access to a station on a network other than CC-Link IE Controller Network.

Transient transmission range of the link dedicated instruction In a single network system, communication with all stations on the network is possible. In multi-network system, communications can be made with stations up to eight networks apart

CC-Link dedicated instructions The following table lists the instructions used for transient transmission with CC-Link IE Controller Network-compliant devices.

Transient transmission range of CC-Link dedicated instructions Communication with all stations in the same network is possible. Communication is not available with stations in other networks.

Other dedicated instructions This instruction is for setting the parameter on the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module of the own station.

Transient transmission range of other dedicated instructions Only the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module of the own station can be accessed.

Instruction Description READ Reads data from the word device of another station.

SREAD Reads data from the word device of another station. (with completion device)

WRITE Writes data in the word device of another station.

SWRITE Writes data in the word device of another station. (with completion device)

SEND Sends data to another station.

RECV Reads the receive data from another station. (for main program)

RECVS Reads the receive data from another station. (for interrupt program)

REQ Requests the remote RUN/STOP to the CPU module on another station.

Reads/writes clock data from/to another station.

ZNRD Reads data from the word device of another station. (for A series)

ZNWR Writes data in the word device of another station. (for A series)

RRUN Sends the request of remote RUN to another station.

RSTOP Sends the request of remote STOP to another station.

RTMRD Reads the clock data from another station.

RTMWR Writes the clock data to another station.

Instruction Description RIRD Reads the specified points of data from the target station device.

RIWT Writes the specified points of data to the target station device.

Instruction Description UINI Sets a station number for a normal station.

0 APPX Appendix 6 Dedicated Instruction

A

Precautions for dedicated instructions This section describes precautions when using dedicated instructions.

Precautions for dedicated instructions (common) When changing data specified by dedicated instructions Do not change any data (such as control data) until execution of the dedicated instruction is completed.

When the dedicated instruction is not completed Check whether the mode of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module is online. A dedicated instruction cannot be executed when the mode is offline or module communication test.

Precautions for dedicated instructions (when used in a redundant system) System switching during execution of a dedicated instruction When systems are switched during execution of a dedicated instruction, the dedicated instruction may not be completed. Execute the dedicated instruction again from the control system CPU module after system switching.

Specification of the target station CPU type in dedicated instructions For a dedicated instruction in which the target station CPU type can be specified with a control data, the control system CPU, standby system CPU, system A CPU, or system B CPU can be accessed by this instruction when the target station CPU type is specified in it. ( MELSEC iQ-R Programming Manual (Module Dedicated Instructions))

Processing at abnormal end of a dedicated instruction When the dedicated instruction is executed by specifying the access destination CPU module, it may be completed with an error if systems are switched in the target station. If the dedicated instruction was completed with an error, execute it again.

SEND instruction When the target station is in a redundant system, the communication request source station must identify that the target

station is the control system to execute the SEND instruction. When the target station is the standby system, the RECV instruction is not executed at the target station after data is sent by the SEND instruction, and the target station storage channel becomes occupied and unable to be used.

When a redundant system exists in a network where broadcast communications are performed, the RECV instruction is not executed at the standby system, and the storage channel becomes occupied and unable to be used.

RECV and RECVS instructions When the SEND instruction is executed for the control system, if the systems are switched before execution of the RECV

instruction and interrupt program, the control system retains RECV instruction execution request area (SB0030 to SB0037) and the interrupt program interrupt factor (interrupt pointer). If system switching occurs again, and the standby system is switched to the control system, the RECV instruction and interrupt program will be executed by the data retained in RECV instruction execution request area (SB0030 to SB0037) and the retained interrupt program interrupt factor.

When the SEND instruction is executed for the standby system, and the standby system receives data from the sending station, the standby system retains RECV instruction execution request area (SB0030 to SB0037) and the interrupt program interrupt factor (interrupt pointer). Therefore, when the standby system is switched to the control system due to system switching, the RECV instruction and interrupt program will be executed by the data retained in RECV instruction execution request area (SB0030 to SB0037) and the retained interrupt program interrupt factor.

REQ, RRUN, and RSTOP instructions When performing remote STOP or remote RUN on a redundant system, do as follows: Perform STOP on the standby system STOP on the control system RUN on the control system RUN on the standby system.

UINI instruction The station number cannot be set by the UINI instruction in a redundant system.

APPX Appendix 6 Dedicated Instruction 201

20

Precautions for link dedicated instructions The following describes precautions when executing multiple link dedicated instructions simultaneously.

Channel of the link dedicated instructions When executing multiple link dedicated instructions simultaneously, check that the channels for the instructions are not duplicated. When the same channel is to be set for different tasks, access to one of other stations first and after completion of the access, access to another. The completion status of a dedicated instruction can be checked with the completion device of the instruction.

Simultaneous execution of a link dedicated instruction The following table lists operations when link dedicated instructions are executed at the same time. : Executable, : Executable if not using the same channel (When the same channel is used, the latter instruction is not executed.) : Not executable (The latter one is not executed.)

Link dedicated instructions Instruction to be executed concurrently

READ/SREAD/WRITE/SWRITE/SEND/ RECV/RECVS/REQ/RRUN/RSTOP/ RTMRD/RTMWR

ZNRD ZNWR

READ/SREAD/WRITE/SWRITE/SEND/ RECV/RECVS/REQ/RRUN/RSTOP/ RTMRD/RTMWR

ZNRD

ZNWR

2 APPX Appendix 6 Dedicated Instruction

A

Appendix 7 Processing Time The processing time of the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module consists of the time components below. Sending-side sequence scan time + Link scan time + Receiving-side sequence scan time = Transmission delay time

Sequence scan time: MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application) Link scan time: Page 203 Link scan time Transmission delay time: Page 204 Cyclic transmission delay time

Link scan time The following is the formula to calculate the time required for all the stations on the network to transmit data.

Case of other than extended mode Case of assigning LB/LW setting (1) and LX/LY setting (1) LS = [KB + (n 56) + {LB + LY + (LW 16)} 8 0.016 + (NT T 30)] 1000 + Nc [ms]*1

KB (constant): Total number of stations: 1 to 32 1100, Total number of stations: 33 to 64 2100, Total number of stations: 65 to 120 3100

In addition to above, case of assigning LB/LW setting (2) or LX/LY setting (2) LS = [1100 + (n 116) + {LB + LY + (LW 16)} 8 0.016 + (NT T 30)] 1000 + Nc [ms]*1

Case of extended mode LS = [1100 + (n 116) + {LB + LY + (LW 16)} 8 0.017 + (NT T 30)] 1000 + Nc [ms]*1

*1 The meaning of the variables in the equation are as follows.

Vari able

Meaning

n Total number of stations (stations actually connected, not including reserved stations)

LB Total number of LB points set using LB/LW setting (1) and LB/LW setting (2) (excluding reserved stations) ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment)

LW Total number of LW points set using LB/LW setting (1) and LB/LW setting (2) (excluding reserved stations) ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment)

LY Total number of LY points set using LX/LY setting (1) and LX/LY setting (2) (excluding reserved stations) ( Page 76 Network Range Assignment)

NT Number of stations transient is being executed on (total number of stations if number of transient transmissions is specified) ( Page 33 Cyclic transmission punctuality assurance)

T Maximum number of transients for one station ( Page 90 Supplementary Cyclic Settings)

Nc Line control time for one station (normal value: 50ms, worst case: 100ms) The time for reconfiguring the data link if the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module is disconnected or reset by cable disconnection or powering off and on the system. (0ms if the module is not disconnected or reset) Causes an error on all stations for cyclic transmission status and baton pass status if during line control. If the constant link scan time setting value is large, it takes a lot of time before the start of line control, and there are cases where the time required for completion of reconfiguration of the data link exceeds 100ms. If several cable disconnections or power off on instances occur at the same time, line control processing overlaps one another, and the line control time may exceed 100ms.

B LB BLB

Link scan time

Sending side

Sequence scan time

CPU module

Link device

CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module

Receiving side

Sequence scan time

CPU module

Link device

Device or global label

Device or global label

APPX Appendix 7 Processing Time 203

20

Cyclic transmission delay time The following are the formulas to calculate cyclic transmission delay time.

In the case of a single network system When a redundant system is not used

TD1 to TD4: Transmission delay time (normal value) TD1max to TD4max: Transmission delay time (maximum value) ST: Sequence scan time on sending side (excluding link refresh time) SR: Sequence scan time on receiving side (excluding link refresh time) T: Link refresh time on sending side (total number of mountable network modules) R: Link refresh time on receiving side (total number of mountable network modules) LS: Link scan time

Condition Calculation formula For ST > LS Station-based

block data assured

Other than extended mode

Normal value TD1 = (ST + T) 1.5 + LS 0.5 + (SR + R) 1.5

Maximum value TD1max = (ST + T) 2 + LS 1 + (SR + R) 2

Extended mode used

Normal value TD1 = (ST + T) 1.5 + LS 0.5 + (SR + R) 2.5

Maximum value TD1max = (ST + T) 2 + LS 1 + (SR + R) 3

Station-based block data not assured

Other than extended mode

Normal value TD2 = (ST + T) + LS 0.5 + (SR + R) 1.5

Maximum value TD2max = (ST + T) + LS + (SR + R) 2

Extended mode used

Normal value TD2 = (ST + T) + LS 0.5 + (SR + R) 1.5

Maximum value TD2max = (ST + T) + LS + (SR + R) 2

For ST < LS Station-based block data assured

Other than extended mode

Normal value TD3 = (ST + T) + LS + (SR + R) 1.5

Maximum value TD3max = (ST + T) + LS 2 + (SR + R) 2

Extended mode used

Normal value TD3 = (ST + T) + LS 2 + (SR + R) 2.5

Maximum value TD3max = (ST + T) + LS 3 + (SR + R) 3

Station-based block data not assured

Other than extended mode

Normal value TD4 = (ST + T) + LS 0.5 + (SR + R) 1.5

Maximum value TD4max = (ST + T) + LS + (SR + R) 2

Extended mode used

Normal value TD4 = (ST + T) + LS + (SR + R) 1.5

Maximum value TD4max = (ST + T) + LS 2 + (SR + R) 2

4 APPX Appendix 7 Processing Time

A

When a redundant system is used

TDr1 to TDr4: Transmission delay time (normal value) TDr1max to TDr4max: Transmission delay time (maximum value) TD1 to TD4: Transmission delay time when a redundant system is not used (normal value) TD1max to TD4max: Transmission delay time when a redundant system is not used (maximum value) ST: Sequence scan time on sending side (excluding link refresh time) LS: Link scan time Ts: Extended scan time due to tracking ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

In the case of a multi-network system The following shows the cyclic transmission delay time for the case where link device data are transferred to another network with the interlink transmission function. TD = (ST + T) + LST + LSR + (SR 2 + R) [ms] TD: Transmission delay time ST: Sequence scan time on sending side (excluding link refresh time) SR: Sequence scan time on receiving side (excluding link refresh time) T: Link refresh time on sending side (total number of mountable network modules) R: Link refresh time on receiving side (total number of mountable network modules) LST: Link scan time on sending side LSR: Link scan time on receiving side

Condition Calculation formula For ST > LS Station-based

block data assured

Other than extended mode

Normal value TDr1 = TD1 + Ts 1.5

Maximum value TDr1max = TD1max + Ts 2

Extended mode used

Normal value TDr1 = TD1 + Ts 1.5

Maximum value TDr1max = TD1max + Ts 2

No station- based block data assurance

Other than extended mode

Normal value TDr2 = TD2 + Ts 1.5

Maximum value TDr2max = TD2max + Ts 2

Extended mode used

Normal value TDr2 = TD2 + Ts 1.5

Maximum value TDr2max = TD2max + Ts 2

For ST < LS Station-based block data assured

Other than extended mode

Normal value TDr3 = TD3 + Ts 1.5

Maximum value TDr3max = TD3max + Ts 2

Extended mode used

Normal value TDr3 = TD3 + Ts 1.5

Maximum value TDr3max = TD3max + Ts 2

No station- based block data assurance

Other than extended mode

Normal value TDr4 = TD4 + Ts 1.5

Maximum value TDr4max = TD4max + Ts 2

Extended mode used

Normal value TDr4 = TD4 + Ts 1.5

Maximum value TDr4max = TD4max + Ts 2

APPX Appendix 7 Processing Time 205

20

Interlink transmission time The following is the formula to calculate the time required for interlink transmission. Interlink transmission does not affect the sequence scan time.

Interlink transmission time to completely transmit all set points DL = KM4 (LB 16 + LW)[ms] DL: Interlink transmission time LB: Total number of LB points set in "Interlink Transmission Settings" of "Application Settings". LW: Total number of LW points set in "Interlink Transmission Settings" of "Application Settings". Constant (KM4)

Precautions The interlink transmission time may become longer due to the following causes. Communication with the engineering tool (such as CC-Link IE Controller diagnostics or module diagnostics) Execution of a link dedicated instruction Link refresh Interlink transmission between other units

Base unit to which the network module is mounted KM4(10-3)

Transfer source Transfer destination Main base unit Main base unit 0.470

Main base unit Extension base unit 0.478

Extension base unit Main base unit 0.483

Extension base unit Extension base unit 0.489

6 APPX Appendix 7 Processing Time

A

Cyclic data holding time when system switching occurs This section describes cyclic data holding time when system switching occurs.

Calculation formula The following are the formulas to calculate cyclic data holding time when system switching occurs.*1

*1 The meanings of the variables in the equation are as follows.

*2 For delay time until detection of the system switching cause, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

Pattern No. System switching cause Condition Cyclic data holding time (TH) [ms] Timing chart 1 Power-off of the control

system Failure of the control system

CPU module Failure of the control system

base unit

The control station is in a redundant system.

Tjo < Csw

Delay time until detection of the system switching cause*2 + Tsw + Csw + SS

Page 208 Pattern 1

2 The control station is redundant.

Tjo > Csw

Delay time until detection of the system switching cause*2 + Tsw + Tjo + SS

Page 209 Pattern 2

3 A normal station is redundant.

Page 210 Pattern 3

4 Stop error of the control system CPU module

Execution of the system switching instruction

System switching request from the engineering tool

System switching request from another network module

Delay time until detection of the system switching cause*2 + Tsw + Tjo + SS

Page 211 Pattern 4

5 System switching request from the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module (own station).

150 + Td + Tc + Delay time until detection of the system switching cause*2

+ Tsw + Tjo + SS

Page 212 Pattern 5

Variable Meaning Tjo Delay time until initial output after system switching [ms] ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Tsw CPU module system switching time [ms] ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Tc System switching monitoring time setting value ( Page 90 Supplementary Cyclic Settings)

Td Data link monitoring time setting value ( Page 90 Supplementary Cyclic Settings)

Csw Control station switching time [ms] = 20 + Constant link scan time setting value ( Page 90 Supplementary Cyclic Settings)

SS CPU module sequence scan time [ms] ( MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application))

Nc Line control time for one station (normal value: 50ms, worst case: 100ms). The time for reconfiguring the data link if the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module is disconnected or reset by cable disconnection or powering off and on the system. (0ms if the module is not disconnected or reset) Cyclic transmission status and baton pass status will be error on all stations during line control. If the constant link scan time setting value is large, it takes a lot of time before the start of line control, and there are cases where the time required for completion of reconfiguration of the data link exceeds 100ms. If several cable disconnections or power off on instances occur at the same time, line control processing overlaps one another, and the line control time may exceed 100ms.

APPX Appendix 7 Processing Time 207

20

Timing chart This section describes a timing chart for each system switching cause.

Pattern 1 The following figure shows a timing chart for normal value.

1) 2)0)

1 2 3

4)3)

4)3)2)1)0)

3 4 5

Control station Communication error station

Power down

Sequence scan time (SS)

Sequence scan time (SS)

Data sent from station No.1 to another station

System A

System B

Data sent from station No.2 to another station

Data received at another station from station No.1 or 2

Control system

Control system

Standby system

Standby system

System switching time (Tsw)

Normal station Sub-control station

Cyclic transmission delay time Cyclic transmission delay time

Cyclic data retention time (TH)

Control station Station No.1

Normal station Station No.2

Delay time until system switching cause detection

Delay time until first output after system switching (Tjo)

Another station

System A Control station Station No.1

System B Normal station Station No.2

Control station switching time (Csw)

8 APPX Appendix 7 Processing Time

A

Pattern 2 The following figure shows a timing chart for normal value.

1) 2)0)

1 2 3

4)3)

4)3)2)1)0)

3 4 5

Control station Communication error station

Power down

Sequence scan time (SS)

Sequence scan time (SS)

Data sent from station No.1 to another station

System A

System B

Data sent from station No.2 to another station

Data received at another station from station No.1 or 2

Control system

Control system

Standby system

Standby system

Normal station Sub-control station

Cyclic transmission delay time Cyclic transmission delay time

Control station Station No.1

Another station

System A Control station Station No.1

System B Normal station Station No.2

Normal station Station No.2

Delay time until system switching cause detection

Cyclic data retention time (TH)

Control station switching time (Csw) Delay time until first output after system switching (Tjo)

System switching time (Tsw)

APPX Appendix 7 Processing Time 209

21

Pattern 3 The following figure shows a timing chart for normal value.

1) 2)0)

1 2 3

4)3)

4)3)2)1)0)

3 4 5

Communication error station

Power down

Sequence scan time (SS)

Sequence scan time (SS)

Data sent from station No.1 to another station

System A

System B

Data sent from station No.2 to another station

Data received at another station from station No.1 or 2

Control system

Control system

Standby system

Standby system

Cyclic transmission delay time Cyclic transmission delay time

Normal station Station No.1

Delay time until system switching cause detection

Normal station

Cyclic data retention time (TH)

Delay time until first output after system switching (Tjo)

System switching time (Tsw)

Another station

System A Normal station Station No.1

System B Normal station Station No.2

0 APPX Appendix 7 Processing Time

A

Pattern 4

1) 2)0)

1 2 3

4)3)

4)3)2)1)0)

3 4 5

CPU stop error

Data sent from station No.1 to another station

System A

System B

Data sent from station No.2 to another station

Data received at another station from station No.1 or 2

Control system

Control system

Standby system

Standby system

Cyclic transmission delay time Cyclic transmission delay time

Delay time until system switching cause detection

Cyclic data retention time (TH)

Delay time until first output after system switching (Tjo)

System switching time (Tsw)

Sequence scan time (SS)

Sequence scan time (SS)

Another station

System A Normal station Station No.1

System B Normal station Station No.2

APPX Appendix 7 Processing Time 211

21

Pattern 5

1

0) 1)

OFF

ON

2 3

4 5

4) 5)

0) 1) 4)

Data link error status of own station' (SB0049)

Control station Station No.1 Control station Communication error station

Sequence scan time (SS)

Sequence scan time (SS)

Data sent from station No.1 to another station

System A

System B

Data sent from station No.2 to another station

Data received at another station from station No.1 or 2

Control system

Control systemStandby system

Standby system

Data link monitoring time

System switching monitoring time

Issue of system switching request

Cyclic transmission delay time Cyclic transmission delay time

Communication error occurred

Delay time until system switching cause detection

System A Control station Station No.1

System B Normal station Station No.2

Another station

Cyclic data retention time (TH)

Delay time until first output after system switching (Tjo)

System switching time (Tsw)

2 APPX Appendix 7 Processing Time

APPX Appendix 8 Added and Enhanced Functions 213

A

Appendix 8 Added and Enhanced Functions The following table lists the added and enhanced functions in the CC-Link IE Controller Network-equipped module. : Available (No version restriction), : Not available

*1 There are restrictions on the CPU module to be used. For details, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

*2 There are restrictions on the CPU module to be used. For CPU modules that support the link points extended setting, refer to the following. MELSEC iQ-R CPU Module User's Manual (Application)

*3 The firmware version is for the network part.

Added and enhanced function Firmware version

RJ71GP21-SX RJ71GP21S-SX RJ71EN71 RnENCPU CC-Link IE Controller Network function*1 "03" or later

Network map update in the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics "05" or later "05" or later

Redundant system function*1 "12" or later

External power supply function

Link points extended setting*2 "36" or later "36" or later "39" or later "39" or later*3

"Link points extended setting" when the Process CPU is used*2 "56" or later "56" or later

214

INDEX

0 to 9 32-bit data assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

C Cable test (only when Ethernet cables are used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 CC-Link dedicated instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics. . . . . 111 Communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Communications using LB and LW . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Communications using LX and LY . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Constant link scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 CPU module (built-in Ethernet port part) . . . . . . . 16

D Data link monitoring time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Diagnostic items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Diagnostics window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

E Equal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Error information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Event history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 External power supply function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

I Identical point assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

L LB/LW setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Link dedicated instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Link start/stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 LX/LY setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

M Module communication test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96,108 Module information list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

N Network status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 New control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

O Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

P Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Process CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

R Redundant function module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Redundant system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 RnENCPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 RnENCPU (CPU part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 RnENCPU (network part) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

S Select diagnostics destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Select station network device status display . . . .119 Selected station communication status monitor . .127 Shared group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Specification of the number of transient transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Standby system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Station-based block data assurance . . . . . . . . . . .27 System switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

T Tracking cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Transient transmission settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

I

215

MEMO

216

REVISIONS *The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Japanese manual number: SH-081254-L

2014 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

Revision date *Manual number Description June 2014 SH(NA)-081258ENG-A First edition

November 2014 SH(NA)-081258ENG-B Added model RJ71EN71 Added function CC-Link IE Controller Network function of the RJ71EN71 Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INTRODUCTION, TERMS, Section 1.2, 1.3, 1.5, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, Chapter 3, Appendix 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8

February 2015 SH(NA)-081258ENG-C Added function Network map update in the CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics of the RJ71EN71 Added or modified parts Section 3.1, 3.3, 3.5, 3.7, Appendix 4, 5, 7

July 2015 SH(NA)-081258ENG-D Added model R04ENCPU, R08ENCPU, R16ENCPU, R32ENCPU, R120ENCPU Added or modified parts INTRODUCTION, TERMS, Section 1.3, 1.5, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, Appendix 1, 2, 3, 8

May 2016 SH(NA)-081258ENG-E Added function Redundant system function Added or modified parts TERMS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.6, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, Appendix 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

April 2017 SH(NA)-081258ENG-F Added function Improvements on CC-Link IE Controller Network diagnostics Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, INTRODUCTION, RELEVANT MANUALS, TERMS, Section 3.3

May 2018 SH(NA)-081258ENG-G Added model RJ71GP21S-SX Added function External Power Supply Function Added or modified parts INTRODUCTION, TERMS, Section 1.6, 1.7, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.1, 3.2, 3.7, Appendix 4, 5, 7, 8

April 2019 SH(NA)-081258ENG-H Added function Link points extended setting Added or modified parts Section 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.3, 3.5, 3.6, Appendix 4, 8

April 2021 SH(NA)-081258ENG-I Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT, Section 1.1

July 2021 SH(NA)-081258ENG-J Added function "Link points extended setting" when the Process CPU is used Added or modified parts RELEVANT MANUALS, Section 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.7, 2.4, 3.1, Appendix 7, 8

April 2022 SH(NA)-081258ENG-K Added or modified parts SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, TERMS, GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS, Section 3.5, Appendix 1

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

217

WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.

1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company. However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning, maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module. [Gratis Warranty Term] The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place. Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months, and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs. [Gratis Warranty Range] (1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc., which

follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution labels on the product.

(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases. 1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure caused

by the user's hardware or software design. 2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user. 3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if functions

or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.

4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.

5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.

6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi. 7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.

2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production (1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is discontinued.

Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc. (2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.

3. Overseas service Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to: (1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi. (2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products. (3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and

compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products. (4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.

218

TRADEMARKS Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The company names, system names and product names mentioned in this manual are either registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. In some cases, trademark symbols such as '' or '' are not specified in this manual.

SH(NA)-081258ENG-K

SH(NA)-081258ENG-K(2204)MEE MODEL: R-CCIEC-U-OU-E MODEL CODE: 13JX17

Specifications subject to change without not

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the R32ENCPU Mitsubishi works, you can view and download the Mitsubishi R32ENCPU Controller Network User's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the User's Manual for Mitsubishi R32ENCPU as well as other Mitsubishi manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The User's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Mitsubishi R32ENCPU. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mitsubishi R32ENCPU Controller Network User's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mitsubishi R32ENCPU Controller Network User's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mitsubishi R32ENCPU Controller Network User's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mitsubishi R32ENCPU Controller Network User's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mitsubishi R32ENCPU Controller Network User's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.